NXP CodeWarrior Development Studio software Targeting Manual

CodeWarrior Development Studio for

StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures

Targeting Manual

Document Number: CWSCDBGUG

Rev. 10.9.0, 11/2015

2

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Section number

Contents

Title Page

Chapter 1

Introduction

1.1

Release notes...................................................................................................................................................................17

1.2

Contents of this manual.................................................................................................................................................. 17

1.3

Accompanying documentation....................................................................................................................................... 18

1.4

CodeWarrior Development Studio tools.........................................................................................................................19

1.4.1

Eclipse IDE........................................................................................................................................................ 19

1.4.2

C Compiler.........................................................................................................................................................20

1.4.3

Assembler...........................................................................................................................................................20

1.4.4

Linker................................................................................................................................................................. 21

1.4.5

Debugger............................................................................................................................................................21

1.4.6

CodeWarrior Profiling and Analysis tools.........................................................................................................21

1.5

CodeWarrior IDE............................................................................................................................................................22

1.5.1

Project files........................................................................................................................................................ 23

1.5.2

Code editing....................................................................................................................................................... 23

1.5.3

Compiling...........................................................................................................................................................24

1.5.4

Linking............................................................................................................................................................... 24

1.5.5

Debugging..........................................................................................................................................................24

Chapter 2

Working with Projects

2.1

CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard.........................................................................................................................27

2.1.1

Create a CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Page..................................................................................................28

2.1.2

Processor Page................................................................................................................................................... 29

2.1.3

Debug Target Settings Page...............................................................................................................................30

2.1.4

Build Settings Page............................................................................................................................................ 32

2.1.5

SmartDSP OS Page............................................................................................................................................34

2.2

Creating projects............................................................................................................................................................. 35

2.2.1

Creating CodeWarrior Bareboard Project..........................................................................................................35

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

3

Section number Title Page

2.3

Importing Projects...........................................................................................................................................................38

2.3.1

Importing SmartDSP OS Project....................................................................................................................... 38

2.4

Building projects.............................................................................................................................................................43

2.4.1

Manual-Build mode........................................................................................................................................... 43

2.4.2

Auto-Build mode................................................................................................................................................45

2.5

Deleting Projects.............................................................................................................................................................46

Chapter 3

Build Properties

3.1

Changing Build Properties..............................................................................................................................................47

3.2

Restoring Build Properties..............................................................................................................................................48

3.3

Build Properties for StarCore..........................................................................................................................................48

3.3.1

StarCore Environment........................................................................................................................................50

3.3.2

StarCore 3900 Disassembler..............................................................................................................................52

3.3.2.1

Disassembler Settings........................................................................................................................ 53

3.3.3

StarCore 3900 C/C++ Linker Application ........................................................................................................ 55

3.3.3.1

Linker Settings................................................................................................................................... 56

3.3.3.2

C/C++ Options .................................................................................................................................. 57

3.3.3.3

Libraries............................................................................................................................................. 58

3.3.4

StarCore 3900 C/C++ Compiler ....................................................................................................................... 60

3.3.4.1

C/C++ Language................................................................................................................................ 61

3.3.4.2

Control............................................................................................................................................... 63

3.3.4.3

Hardware Configuration.................................................................................................................... 64

3.3.4.4

Output Listing.................................................................................................................................... 65

3.3.4.5

Warnings............................................................................................................................................ 67

3.3.4.5.1

Compiler Front End Messages........................................................................................68

3.3.4.5.2

Assembler....................................................................................................................... 71

3.3.4.5.3

Linker..............................................................................................................................72

3.3.4.6

Include Search Paths.......................................................................................................................... 73

3.3.4.7

Macros................................................................................................................................................75

4

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Section number Title Page

3.3.4.8

Processor............................................................................................................................................ 77

3.3.4.9

Optimization.......................................................................................................................................78

3.3.4.10 Configuration Files............................................................................................................................ 81

3.3.4.11 Additional Arguments........................................................................................................................82

3.3.5

StarCore 3900 Assembler ................................................................................................................................. 83

3.3.5.1

Code and Language Options.............................................................................................................. 84

3.3.5.2

Include Search Paths.......................................................................................................................... 88

3.3.5.3

Preprocessor....................................................................................................................................... 90

3.3.5.4

Listing File......................................................................................................................................... 92

3.3.5.5

Listing Contents................................................................................................................................. 94

3.3.5.6

Listing Format....................................................................................................................................96

3.3.5.7

Additional Arguments........................................................................................................................98

3.3.6

StarCore 3900 Preprocessor...............................................................................................................................99

3.3.6.1

Preprocessor Settings......................................................................................................................... 100

Chapter 4

Debug Configurations

4.1

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................103

4.1.1

Main................................................................................................................................................................... 104

4.1.1.1

Debug Session Type ..........................................................................................................................105

4.1.1.1.1

Attach .............................................................................................................................107

4.1.1.1.2

Connect .......................................................................................................................... 108

4.1.1.1.3

Download .......................................................................................................................108

4.1.1.1.4

Custom ........................................................................................................................... 109

4.1.1.2

C/C++ application.............................................................................................................................. 109

4.1.1.3

Build (if required) before launching ................................................................................................. 110

4.1.1.4

Target settings.................................................................................................................................... 111

4.1.2

Arguments..........................................................................................................................................................111

4.1.3

Debugger............................................................................................................................................................112

4.1.3.1

Debug................................................................................................................................................. 114

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

5

Section number Title Page

4.1.3.2

Download........................................................................................................................................... 115

4.1.3.3

Other Executables.............................................................................................................................. 117

4.1.3.4

Symbolics...........................................................................................................................................118

4.1.3.5

OS Awareness.................................................................................................................................... 120

4.1.4

Source.................................................................................................................................................................121

4.1.5

Environment.......................................................................................................................................................123

4.1.6

Common.............................................................................................................................................................124

4.1.7

Trace and Profile................................................................................................................................................125

4.2

Customizing Debug Configurations............................................................................................................................... 129

4.3

Reverting Debug Configuration Settings........................................................................................................................131

Chapter 5

Working with Debugger

5.1

Debugging a CodeWarrior project..................................................................................................................................133

5.1.1

Debugging Project Using Simulator.................................................................................................................. 134

5.1.2

Debugging Project using Target Hardware........................................................................................................137

5.2

Configuring Connections................................................................................................................................................140

5.2.1

CodeWarrior Connection Server........................................................................................................................141

5.2.1.1

Running CCS..................................................................................................................................... 142

5.2.1.2

Displaying CCS Console................................................................................................................... 142

5.2.1.3

Configuring CCS................................................................................................................................143

5.2.2

Connection types................................................................................................................................................144

5.2.2.1

CCSSIM2 ISS.................................................................................................................................... 144

5.2.2.2

CCSSIM2 PACC................................................................................................................................146

5.2.2.3

Ethernet TAP......................................................................................................................................147

5.2.2.4

Gigabit TAP + Trace..........................................................................................................................149

5.2.2.5

Gigabit TAP....................................................................................................................................... 151

5.2.2.6

USB TAP........................................................................................................................................... 153

5.2.2.7

CodeWarrior TAP.............................................................................................................................. 154

5.2.2.7.1

CodeWarrior TAP - JTAG Connection through USB.................................................... 156

6

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Section number Title Page

5.2.2.7.2

CodeWarrior TAP - JTAG Connection through Ethernet.............................................. 157

5.3

Editing remote system configuration.............................................................................................................................. 158

5.3.1

Initialization tab................................................................................................................................................. 159

5.3.2

Memory tab........................................................................................................................................................ 160

5.3.3

I/O Model Tab....................................................................................................................................................161

5.3.4

Advanced tab......................................................................................................................................................162

5.4

Working with Breakpoints..............................................................................................................................................162

5.4.1

Setting Breakpoints............................................................................................................................................ 163

5.4.2

Setting Hardware Breakpoints........................................................................................................................... 165

5.4.2.1

Using IDE to Set Hardware Breakpoints........................................................................................... 166

5.4.2.2

Using Debugger Shell to Set Hardware Breakpoints.........................................................................166

5.4.3

Removing Breakpoints.......................................................................................................................................167

5.4.3.1

Remove Breakpoints using Marker Bar.............................................................................................167

5.4.3.2

Remove Breakpoints using Breakpoints View.................................................................................. 167

5.4.4

Removing Hardware Breakpoints......................................................................................................................168

5.4.4.1

Remove Hardware Breakpoints using the IDE.................................................................................. 168

5.4.4.2

Remove Hardware Breakpoints using Debugger Shell......................................................................169

5.5

Working with Watchpoints............................................................................................................................................. 169

5.5.1

Setting Watchpoints........................................................................................................................................... 170

5.5.2

Removing Watchpoints......................................................................................................................................172

5.6

Working with Registers.................................................................................................................................................. 172

5.6.1

Viewing Register Details................................................................................................................................... 174

5.6.1.1

Bit Fields............................................................................................................................................ 175

5.6.1.2

Changing Bit Fields........................................................................................................................... 176

5.6.1.3

Actions............................................................................................................................................... 177

5.6.1.4

Description......................................................................................................................................... 178

5.6.2

Registers View Context Menu........................................................................................................................... 178

5.6.3

Working with Register Groups.......................................................................................................................... 179

5.6.3.1

Adding a Register Group................................................................................................................... 180

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

7

Section number Title Page

5.6.3.2

Editing a Register Group....................................................................................................................181

5.6.3.3

Removing a Register Group...............................................................................................................181

5.7

Viewing memory............................................................................................................................................................ 182

5.7.1

Adding Memory Monitor...................................................................................................................................182

5.7.2

Adding Memory Rendering............................................................................................................................... 185

5.7.3

Removing Memory Rendering...........................................................................................................................186

5.7.4

Resetting to Base Address..................................................................................................................................186

5.7.5

Go to Address.....................................................................................................................................................187

5.8

Viewing Cache................................................................................................................................................................187

5.8.1

Cache View........................................................................................................................................................ 188

5.8.2

Cache View Toolbar Menu................................................................................................................................ 190

5.9

Changing Program Counter Value..................................................................................................................................191

5.10 Hard resetting..................................................................................................................................................................192

5.11 Per Core Reset ................................................................................................................................................................192

5.12 Setting Stack Depth.........................................................................................................................................................193

5.13 Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Wizard...............................................................................................................194

5.13.1 Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Page...................................................................................................... 195

5.13.2 Import C/C++/Assembler Executable Files Page.............................................................................................. 196

5.13.3 Processor Page................................................................................................................................................... 197

5.13.4 Debug Target Settings Page...............................................................................................................................197

5.14 Debugging Externally Built Executable Files.................................................................................................................199

5.14.1 Import an Executable File.................................................................................................................................. 199

5.14.2 Edit the Launch Configuration...........................................................................................................................201

5.14.3 Specify the Source Lookup Path........................................................................................................................201

5.14.3.1 Automatic Path Mapping................................................................................................................... 202

5.14.3.2 Manual Path Mapping .......................................................................................................................204

5.14.4 Debug Executable File....................................................................................................................................... 209

8

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Section number Title Page

Chapter 6

Target Initialization File

Chapter 7

Memory Configuration File

Chapter 8

CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

8.1

Working with Debugger Shell ....................................................................................................................................... 215

8.2

Tcl Support......................................................................................................................................................................218

8.2.1

Resolution of Conflicting Command Names..................................................................................................... 218

8.2.2

Execution of Script Files....................................................................................................................................218

8.2.3

Tcl Startup Script............................................................................................................................................... 219

8.3

Command-Line Debugging Tasks ................................................................................................................................. 220

8.4

Debugger Shell Command List ......................................................................................................................................220

8.4.1

about ..................................................................................................................................................................221

8.4.2

alias.................................................................................................................................................................... 222

8.4.3

bp........................................................................................................................................................................222

8.4.4

cd .......................................................................................................................................................................223

8.4.5

change ............................................................................................................................................................... 224

8.4.6

cls ...................................................................................................................................................................... 226

8.4.7

config................................................................................................................................................................. 226

8.4.8

copy ...................................................................................................................................................................228

8.4.9

debug .................................................................................................................................................................229

8.4.10 dir ...................................................................................................................................................................... 229

8.4.11 disassemble ....................................................................................................................................................... 230

8.4.12 display ............................................................................................................................................................... 231

8.4.13 evaluate.............................................................................................................................................................. 233

8.4.14 finish...................................................................................................................................................................234

8.4.15 fl::blankcheck.....................................................................................................................................................234

8.4.16 fl::checksum....................................................................................................................................................... 234

8.4.17 fl::device.............................................................................................................................................................235

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

9

Section number Title Page

8.4.18 fl::diagnose.........................................................................................................................................................235

8.4.19 fl::disconnect......................................................................................................................................................235

8.4.20 fl::dump..............................................................................................................................................................235

8.4.21 fl::erase...............................................................................................................................................................236

8.4.22 fl::image............................................................................................................................................................. 236

8.4.23 fl::protect............................................................................................................................................................236

8.4.24 fl::secure.............................................................................................................................................................237

8.4.25 fl::target..............................................................................................................................................................237

8.4.26 fl::verify............................................................................................................................................................. 237

8.4.27 fl::write...............................................................................................................................................................238

8.4.28 funcs................................................................................................................................................................... 238

8.4.29 getIDEpref..........................................................................................................................................................238

8.4.30 getpid..................................................................................................................................................................239

8.4.31 go........................................................................................................................................................................239

8.4.32 help.....................................................................................................................................................................240

8.4.33 history.................................................................................................................................................................240

8.4.34 jtagclock............................................................................................................................................................. 241

8.4.35 kill...................................................................................................................................................................... 241

8.4.36 launch................................................................................................................................................................. 242

8.4.37 loadsym.............................................................................................................................................................. 242

8.4.38 log.......................................................................................................................................................................242

8.4.39 mc::config.......................................................................................................................................................... 243

8.4.40 mc::go.................................................................................................................................................................243

8.4.41 mc::group........................................................................................................................................................... 244

8.4.42 mc::kill............................................................................................................................................................... 244

8.4.43 mc::reset ............................................................................................................................................................ 244

8.4.44 mc::restart ..........................................................................................................................................................244

8.4.45 mc::stop..............................................................................................................................................................245

8.4.46 mc::type..............................................................................................................................................................245

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

10 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Section number Title Page

8.4.47 mem....................................................................................................................................................................245

8.4.48 next.....................................................................................................................................................................247

8.4.49 nexti....................................................................................................................................................................248

8.4.50 oneframe.............................................................................................................................................................248

8.4.51 protocol.............................................................................................................................................................. 248

8.4.52 pwd.....................................................................................................................................................................248

8.4.53 quitIDE...............................................................................................................................................................249

8.4.54 radix................................................................................................................................................................... 249

8.4.55 redirect............................................................................................................................................................... 250

8.4.56 refresh.................................................................................................................................................................250

8.4.57 reg.......................................................................................................................................................................250

8.4.58 reset.................................................................................................................................................................... 250

8.4.59 restart..................................................................................................................................................................251

8.4.60 restore.................................................................................................................................................................251

8.4.61 run...................................................................................................................................................................... 251

8.4.62 save.....................................................................................................................................................................251

8.4.63 sc::setMaxAccessLength....................................................................................................................................252

8.4.64 sc::setReset.........................................................................................................................................................253

8.4.65 sc::getPhysicalAddress.......................................................................................................................................253

8.4.66 setpc................................................................................................................................................................... 253

8.4.67 setpicloadaddr.................................................................................................................................................... 253

8.4.68 stack................................................................................................................................................................... 254

8.4.69 status...................................................................................................................................................................254

8.4.70 step..................................................................................................................................................................... 254

8.4.71 stepi.................................................................................................................................................................... 255

8.4.72 stop..................................................................................................................................................................... 255

8.4.73 switchtarget........................................................................................................................................................ 256

8.4.74 system.................................................................................................................................................................256

8.4.75 var.......................................................................................................................................................................257

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

11

Section number Title Page

8.4.76 wait.....................................................................................................................................................................258

8.4.77 watchpoint..........................................................................................................................................................259

Chapter 9

Multi-Core Debugging

9.1

Creating a JTAG Initialization File.................................................................................................................................261

9.2

Debugging Multi-Core Projects......................................................................................................................................262

9.2.1

Setting Launch Configurations.......................................................................................................................... 263

9.2.2

Debugging Multiple Cores.................................................................................................................................268

9.3

Multi-Core Debugging Commands.................................................................................................................................272

9.3.1

Multi-Core Commands in CodeWarrior IDE.....................................................................................................272

9.3.2

Multi-Core Commands in Debugger Shell........................................................................................................ 274

Chapter 10

Working with Hardware Tools

10.1 Flash programmer........................................................................................................................................................... 277

10.1.1 Create a flash programmer target task............................................................................................................... 278

10.1.2 Configure flash programmer target task............................................................................................................ 280

10.1.2.1 Add flash device.................................................................................................................................280

10.1.2.2 Specify target RAM settings.............................................................................................................. 281

10.1.2.3 Add flash programmer actions...........................................................................................................281

10.1.2.3.1 Erase/Blank check actions.............................................................................................. 282

10.1.2.3.2 Program/Verify actions...................................................................................................283

10.1.2.3.3 Checksum actions........................................................................................................... 284

10.1.2.3.4 Diagnostics actions......................................................................................................... 285

10.1.2.3.5 Dump Flash actions........................................................................................................ 286

10.1.2.3.6 Protect/Unprotect actions................................................................................................286

10.1.2.3.7 Duplicate action.............................................................................................................. 287

10.1.2.3.8 Remove action................................................................................................................ 287

10.1.3 Execute flash programmer target task................................................................................................................287

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

12 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Section number Title Page

10.1.4 Flash Programmer Use Case.............................................................................................................................. 289

10.1.4.1 Using Flash Programmer to Write uboot Image to Target.................................................................289

10.2 Flash File to Target......................................................................................................................................................... 291

10.2.1 Erasing flash device........................................................................................................................................... 292

10.2.2 Programming a file.............................................................................................................................................293

10.3 Hardware diagnostics......................................................................................................................................................294

10.3.1 Creating hardware diagnostics task....................................................................................................................294

10.3.2 Working with Hardware Diagnostic Action editor............................................................................................ 295

10.3.2.1 Action Type........................................................................................................................................296

10.3.2.2 Memory Access..................................................................................................................................297

10.3.2.3 Loop Speed........................................................................................................................................ 297

10.3.2.4 Memory Tests.................................................................................................................................... 298

10.3.2.4.1 Walking Ones..................................................................................................................299

10.3.2.4.2 Address........................................................................................................................... 300

10.3.2.4.3 Bus noise.........................................................................................................................300

10.3.2.4.4 Address lines...................................................................................................................300

10.3.2.4.5 Data lines........................................................................................................................ 301

10.3.3 Memory test use cases........................................................................................................................................302

10.3.3.1 Use Case 1: Execute host-based Scope Loop on target..................................................................... 302

10.3.3.2 Use Case 2: Execute target-based Memory Tests on target...............................................................302

10.4 Import/Export/Fill memory.............................................................................................................................................303

10.4.1 Creating task for import/export/fill memory......................................................................................................303

10.4.2 Importing data into memory.............................................................................................................................. 305

10.4.3 Exporting memory to file...................................................................................................................................307

10.4.4 Fill memory........................................................................................................................................................308

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

13

Section number Title Page

Chapter 11

Exception Configurator

Chapter 12

Memory Management Unit Configurator

12.1 Creating MMU Configuration........................................................................................................................................ 316

12.2 MMU Configuration File Editor Pages ..........................................................................................................................318

12.2.1 General .............................................................................................................................................................. 318

12.2.2 Translations .......................................................................................................................................................320

12.2.3 new_file.mmu.................................................................................................................................................... 323

12.3 MMU Editor Menu......................................................................................................................................................... 324

12.4 MMU Editor Toolbar......................................................................................................................................................325

12.5 Saving MMU Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................325

12.5.1 Saving MMU Configuration File Editor Settings.............................................................................................. 326

12.5.2 Saving Generated C Code.................................................................................................................................. 326

12.5.3 Saving Generated Assembly Code.....................................................................................................................327

12.5.4 Saving Generated TCL Script............................................................................................................................ 327

12.6 MMU Configurator View .............................................................................................................................................. 328

Chapter 13

Maple Memory Management Unit Configurator

13.1 Maple MMU Configurator View ................................................................................................................................... 331

13.2 Maple MMU Configurator View Pages .........................................................................................................................332

13.2.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 333

13.2.2 Translations........................................................................................................................................................334

13.3 Maple MMU Configurator View Menu..........................................................................................................................336

Chapter 14

StarCore DSP Utilities

14.1 Archiver Utility ..............................................................................................................................................................337

14.2 Disassembler Utility........................................................................................................................................................339

14.3 ELF File Dump Utility....................................................................................................................................................344

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

14 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Section number Title Page

14.4 ELF2XX Utility.............................................................................................................................................................. 348

14.4.1 L1 Defense Support .......................................................................................................................................... 351

14.4.2 Extract core specific images from multicore image...........................................................................................352

14.5 Name Utility....................................................................................................................................................................353

14.6 Size Utility...................................................................................................................................................................... 355

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

15

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

16 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 1

Introduction

This manual explains how to use CodeWarrior Development Studio tools to develop software for Freescale StarCore 3900FP DSP processors.

This chapter provides an overview of this manual and introduces you to the CodeWarrior development tools and development process.

The topics covered here are as follows:

•

Release notes

•

Contents of this manual

•

Accompanying documentation

•

CodeWarrior Development Studio tools

•

CodeWarrior IDE

1.1 Release notes

Release notes include information about new features, last-minute changes, bug fixes, incompatible elements, or other sections that may not be included in this manual.

You should read release notes before using the CodeWarrior IDE.

NOTE

The release notes for specific components of the CodeWarrior

IDE are located in the

Release_Notes

folder in the CodeWarrior installation directory.

1.2 Contents of this manual

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

17

Accompanying documentation

Each chapter of this manual describes a different area of software development.

The table below lists each chapter in the manual.

Table 1-1. Organization of this manual

Chapter

Introduction

Working with Projects

Build Properties

Debug Configurations

Working with Debugger

Target Initialization File

Memory Configuration File

CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Multi-Core Debugging

Working with Hardware Tools

Exception Configurator

Memory Management Unit Configurator

Maple Memory Management Unit Configurator

StarCore DSP Utilities

Description

This chapter.

Describes the different types of projects you can create, provides an overview of CodeWarrior project wizards.

Explains build properties for StarCore projects.

Describes the different types of launch configurations you can create, provides an overview of the debugger.

Explains various aspects of CodeWarrior debugging, such as debugging a project, configuring connections, setting breakpoints and watchpoints, working with registers, viewing memory, viewing cache, and debugging externally built executable files.

Explains what a target initialization file is, and lists an example of the initialization file.

Discusses how to use a memory configuration file.

Explains the CodeWarrior command-line debugger interface, Debugger

Shell.

Explains multi-core debugging capabilities of CodeWarrior debugger.

Explains CodeWarrior hardware tools used for board bring-up, test, and analysis.

Explains the CodeWarrior Exception Configurator tool.

Explains the CodeWarrior Memory Management Unit (MMU) Configurator tool.

Explains the Maple Memory Management Unit (MMU) Configurator tool.

Explains the utility programs included in CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures.

1.3 Accompanying documentation

The Documentation page describes the documentation included in this version of

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures.

You can access the Documentation page by:

• Using a shortcut link that the CodeWarrior installer creates by default on the

Desktop.

• Opening the

START_HERE.html

file available in the

<CWInstallDir>\SC\Help

folder.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

18 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.4 CodeWarrior Development Studio tools

This section talks about some important tools of CodeWarrior Development Studio.

Programming for StarCore 3900FP DSP processors is much like programming for any other CodeWarrior platform target. If you have not used CodeWarrior tools before, start by studying the Eclipse IDE, which is used to host the tools.

Note that CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures uses the Eclipse IDE, whose user interface is substantially different from the "classic"

CodeWarrior IDE. For more details on these interface differences, see CodeWarrior

Development Studio Common Features Guide

available in the

<CWInstallDir>\SC\Help\PDF\ folder.

The following are some important tools of CodeWarrior Development Studio:

•

Eclipse IDE

•

C Compiler

•

Assembler

•

Linker

•

Debugger

•

CodeWarrior Profiling and Analysis tools

1.4.1 Eclipse IDE

The Eclipse Integrated Development Environment (IDE) is an open-source development environment that lets you develop and debug your software. It controls the project manager, the source code editor, the class browser, the compilers and linkers, and the debugger. The Eclipse workspace organizes all files related to your project. This allows you to see your project at a glance and navigate easily through the source code files.

The Eclipse IDE has an extensible architecture that uses plug-in compilers and linkers to target various operating systems and microprocessors. The IDE can be hosted on

Microsoft Windows, Linux, and other platforms. There are many development tools available for the IDE, including C, C++, and Java compilers for desktop and embedded processors

For more information about the Eclipse IDE, read the Eclipse documentation at: http://www.eclipse.org/documentation/

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

19

CodeWarrior Development Studio tools

1.4.2 C Compiler

The StarCore C Compiler:

• Conforms to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C standards.

• Conforms to version 1 of the StarCore Application Binary Interface ( ABI) standards.

• Supports a set of Digital Signal Processor ( DSP) extensions.

• Supports International Telecommunications Union (ITU)/European

Telecommunications Standards Institute ( ETSI) primitives for saturating arithmetic.

Additional parameters are available for non-saturating arithmetic and doubleprecision arithmetic.

• Allows standard C constructs for representing special addressing modes.

• Supports a wide range of runtime libraries and runtime environments.

• Optimizes for size, speed, or a combination of both, depending on options that you select.

The compiler can link all application modules before optimizing. By examining the entire linked application before optimizing, the compiler produces highly optimized code. The compiler performs many optimizations, such as:

• software pipelining

• instruction paralleling and scheduling

• data and address register allocation

• aggressive loop transformations, including automatic unrolling

For more information, see the StarCore C/C++ Compiler User Guide.

1.4.3 Assembler

The CodeWarrior StarCore assembler is a standalone assembler that translates assemblylanguage source code to machine-language object files or executable programs. Either you can provide the assembly-language source code to the assembler, or the assembler can take the assembly-language source code generated by the compiler.

For each assembly-language module in a build target, the StarCore assembler can generate a file that lists the generated code side-by-side with the assembly-language source code.

For more information, see the StarCore Assembler User Guide.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

20 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.4.4 Linker

CodeWarrior Eclipse IDE for Power Architecture processors supports two types of linkers:

• CodeWarrior linker

• GCC linker

The StarCore Linker combines object files into a single executable file. You specify the link mappings of your program in a Linker Command File (LCF).

For more information, see the StarCore Linker (SC3000) User Guide.

1.4.5 Debugger

The CodeWarrior StarCore debugger controls the execution of your program and allows you to see what is happening internally as the program runs. You can use the debugger to find problems in your program.

The debugger can execute your program one statement at a time and suspend execution when control reaches a specified point. When the debugger stops a program, you can view the chain of function calls, examine and change the values of variables, and inspect the contents of registers.

The debugger allows you to debug your CodeWarrior project using either a simulator or target hardware.

The debugger communicates with the board through a monitor program (such as

CodeWarrior TRK) or through a hardware probe (such as CodeWarrior USB TAP).

1.4.6 CodeWarrior Profiling and Analysis tools

CodeWarrior Profiling and Analysis tools provide visibility into an application as it runs on the simulator and hardware. This visibility can help you understand how your application runs, as well as identify operational problems. The tools also provide user friendly data viewing features:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

21

CodeWarrior IDE

• Simultaneously step through trace data and the corresponding source and assembly code of that trace data

• Export source line information of the performance data generated by the simulator into an Excel file

• Export the trace and function data generated by simulator and target hardware into an

Excel file

• Apply multi-level filters to isolate data

• Apply multi-level searches to find specific data

• Display results in an intuitive, user friendly manner in the trace, critical code, and performance views

• Show or hide columns and also reorder the columns

• Copy and paste a cell or a line of the trace, alu-agu and performance data generated by simulator and target hardware

• Control trace collection by using start and stop tracepoints to reduce the amount of unwanted trace events in the trace buffer making the trace data easier to read

• View the value of the DPU counters in form of graphs (pie charts and bar charts) while the application is in debug mode

• Display real time cycle count for simulated targets to allow quick monitoring of evolution of application in time

For more information, see CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP

Architectures Tracing and Analysis Tools User Guide

available in the

<CWInstallDir>\SC

\Help\PDF\

folder.

1.5 CodeWarrior IDE

This section explains the CodeWarrior IDE and tells how to perform basic IDE operations.

While working with the CodeWarrior IDE, you will proceed through the development stages familiar to all programmers, such as writing code, compiling and linking, and debugging. See CodeWarrior Development Studio Common Features Guide for:

• Complete information on tasks, such as editing, compiling, and linking

• Basic information on debugging

The difference between the CodeWarrior development environment and traditional command-line environments is how the software, in this case the CodeWarrior IDE, helps you manage your work more effectively.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

22 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 1 Introduction

The following sections explain the CodeWarrior IDE and describe how to perform basic

CodeWarrior IDE operations:

•

Project files

•

Code editing

•

Compiling

•

Linking

•

Debugging

1.5.1 Project files

A CodeWarrior project is analogous to a set of make files, because a project can have multiple settings that are applied when building the program. For example, you can have one project that has both a debug version and a release version of your program. You can build one or the other, or both as you wish. The different settings used to launch your program within a single project are called launch configurations.

The CodeWarrior IDE uses the CodeWarrior Projects view to list all the files in a project. A project includes files, such as source code files and libraries. You can add or remove files easily. You can assign files to one or more different build configurations within the project, so files common to multiple build configurations can be managed simply.

The CodeWarrior IDE itself manages all the interdependencies between files and tracks which files have changed since the last build.

The CodeWarrior IDE also stores the settings for the compiler and linker options for each build configuration. You can modify these settings using the IDE, or with the

#pragma statements in your code.

1.5.2 Code editing

CodeWarrior IDE has an integral text editor designed for programmers. It handles text files in ASCII, Microsoft® Windows® and UNIX® formats.

To edit a file in a project, double-click the file name in the CodeWarrior Projects view.

CodeWarrior IDE opens the file in the editor associated with the file type.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

23

CodeWarrior IDE

The editor view has excellent navigational features that allow you to switch between related files, locate any particular function, mark any location within a file, or go to a specific line of code.

1.5.3 Compiling

To compile a source code file, it must be among the files that are part of the current launch configuration. If the file is in the configuration, select it in the CodeWarrior

Projects view and select Project > Build Project from the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar.

To automatically compile all the files in the current launch configuration after you modify them, select Project > Build Automatically from the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar.

1.5.4 Linking

Select Project > Build Project from the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar to link object code into a final binary file. The Build Project command makes the active project up-to-date and links the resulting object code into a final output file.

You can control the linker through the IDE. There is no need to specify a list of object files. The workspace tracks all the object files automatically.

You can also modify the build configuration settings to specify the name of the final output file.

1.5.5 Debugging

Select Run > Debug from the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar to debug your project. This command downloads the current project's executable to the target board and starts a debug session.

NOTE

The CodeWarrior IDE uses the settings in the launch configuration to generate debugging information and initiate communications with the target board.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

24 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 1 Introduction

You can now use the debugger to step through the program code, view and change the value of variables, set breakpoints, and much more. For more information, see

CodeWarrior Development Studio Common Features Guide

and the Working with

Debugger chapter of this manual.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

25

CodeWarrior IDE

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

26 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2

Working with Projects

This chapter explains how to create and build projects for StarCore 3900FP DSP processors using the CodeWarrior tools.

This chapter explains:

•

CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard

•

Creating projects

•

Building projects

•

Importing Projects

•

Deleting Projects

2.1 CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard

The term bareboard refers to hardware systems that do not need an operating system to operate.

The CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard presents a series of pages that prompt you for the features and settings to be used when making your program.

For example, the devices options lets you select the derivative or board you would like to use. This wizard also helps you specify other settings, such as whether the program executes on a simulator rather than actual hardware, and the characteristics of the connection that communicates with a hardware target.

This section describes the various pages that the CodeWarrior Bareboard Project

Wizard displays as it assists you in creating a bareboard project.

NOTE

The pages that the wizard presents can differ, based upon the choice of project type or execution target.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

27

CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard

The pages of the CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard are:

•

Create a CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Page

•

Processor Page

•

Debug Target Settings Page

•

Build Settings Page

•

SmartDSP OS Page

2.1.1 Create a CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Page

Use this page to specify the project name and the directory where the project files are located.

Figure 2-1. Create a CodeWarrior Bareboard Project page

The table below describes the various options available on the Create a CodeWarrior

Bareboard Project page.

Table 2-1. Create a CodeWarrior Bareboard Project page settings

Option

Project name

Use default location

Location

Description

Enter the name for the project in this text box.

Select to choose the directory to store the files required to build the program. Use the

Location option to select the desired directory.

Specifies the directory that contains the project files. Use

Browse to navigate to the desired directory. This option is only available when Use default location is cleared.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

28 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

2.1.2 Processor Page

This page displays the target devices supported by the current installation.

Use this page to specify the type of processor and the output for the new project.

Figure 2-2. CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard - Processor Page

NOTE

CodeWarrior for StarCore v10.6.4 and earlier versions support rev1 targets. Support for rev1 targets is discontinued starting

SC10.6.5. Therefore, all rev1 projects need to be migrated to rev2, using 10.6.4 or an earlier version of CodeWarrior

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

29

CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard

software for StarCore. For information on how to migrate projects from rev1 to rev2, see product release notes.

The table below describes the various options available on the Processor page.

NOTE

The pages of the wizard change depending on the selected derivative or board.

Processor

Option

Table 2-2. Processor Page Settings

Description

Expand the processor family tree and select a supported target. The toolchain uses this choice to generate code that makes use of processor-specific features, such as multiple cores. The available options are as follows:

Qonverge family

• B4060: Select to generate projects for multi-core targets: B4060 QDS.

•

B4420: Select to generate projects for multi-core targets: B4420 QDS and B4420

ISS.

•

B4460: Select to generate projects for multi-core targets: B4460 QDS.

• B4860: Select to generate projects for multi-core targets: B4860 QDS, B4860

ISS, and B4860 Palladium.

• G4860: Select to generate projects for multi-core targets: G4860 QDS.

Project Output

SC3900 family

• SC3900fp: Select to generate projects for the single-core targets: SC3900 ISS and SC3900 PACC

Select any one of the following supported project output:

•

Application: Select to create a StarCore application, for the specified target device, that runs on a board or simulator.

•

Component Library: Select to create a component library project, where the entry points and visible symbols are defined in an application file.

•

Self-Contained Library: Select to create a self-contained library, where all unresolved references for symbols will be solved by using first the library's own symbol definitions and then symbol definitions from the other object files or libraries.

•

Simple Library: Select to create an archive of object files can be used to build an application. The archive is created using the sc100-ar.exe archiver utility.

2.1.3 Debug Target Settings Page

Use this page to select debugger connection type, board type, launch configuration type, and connection type for your project.

This page also lets you configure connection settings for your project.

NOTE

This wizard page will prompt you to either create a new remote system configuration or select an existing one. A remote system

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

30 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

is a system configuration that defines connection, initialization, and target parameters. The remote system explorer provides data models and frameworks to configure and manage remote systems, their connections, and their services. For more information, see CodeWarrior Development Studio Common

Features Guide

.

Figure 2-3. CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard - Debug Target Settings Page

The table below describes the various options available on the Debug Target Settings page.

Option

Debugger Connection Types

Board

Launch

Connection Type

Table 2-3. Debug Target Settings page settings

Description

Specifies the available target types:

•

Hardware - Select to execute the program on the target hardware available.

• Simulator - Select to execute the program on a software simulator.

•

Emulator - Select to execute the program on a hardware emulator.

Specifies the hardware supported by the selected processor.

Specifies the launch configurations and corresponding connection, supported by the selected processor.

Specifies the interface to communicate with the hardware.

• CodeWarrior TAP (over USB) - Select to use the CodeWarrior USB TAP interface to communicate with the hardware device.

• CodeWarrior TAP (over Ethernet) - Select to use the CodeWarrior Ethernet

TAP interface to communicate with the hardware device.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

31

CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard

Table 2-3. Debug Target Settings page settings (continued)

Option Description

• USB TAP - Select to use the USB interface to communicate with the hardware device.

• Ethernet TAP - Select to use the Ethernet interface to communicate with the target hardware.

For more details on CodeWarrior TAP, see CodeWarrior TAP User Guide available in the <CWInstallDir>\SC\Help\PDF\ folder, where <CWInstallDir> is the installation directory of your Codewarrior software.

• Gigabit TAP - Corresponds to a Gigabit TAP that includes an Aurora daughter card, which allows you to collect Nexus trace in a real-time non-intrusive fashion from the high speed serial trace port (the Aurora interface).

•

Gigabit TAP + Trace (JTAG over JTAG cable) - Select to use the Gigabit TAP and Trace probe to send JTAG commands over the JTAG cable.

•

Gigabit TAP + Trace (JTAG over Aurora cable) - Select to use the Gigabit TAP and Trace probe to send JTAG commands over the Aurora cable.

TAP address

For more details on Gigabit TAP, see Gigabit TAP Users Guide available in the

<CWInstallDir>\SC\Help\PDF\ folder, where <CWInstallDir> is the installation directory of your Codewarrior software.

Enter the IP address of the TAP device here. This option is available only if

CodeWarrior Ethernet TAP, Ethernet TAP, or Gigabit TAP is selected as the connection type.

2.1.4 Build Settings Page

Use this page to select a programming language, toolchain, and the output project type for your project.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

32 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

Figure 2-4. CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard - Build Settings Page

The table below describes the various options available on the Build Settings page.

Language

Toolchain

Floating Point

Option

Table 2-4. Build Settings Page

Description

Specifies the programming language used by the new project. The current installation supports the following languages:

• C - Select to generate ANSI C-compliant startup code, and initializes global variables.

• C++ - Select to generate ANSI C++ startup code, and performs global class object initialization.

•

ASM - Select to generate Assembly startup code.

Specifies the toolchains supported by the current installation. Selected toolchain sets up the default compiler, linker, and libraries used to build the new project. Each toolchain generates code targeted for a specific platform.

Select floating point support type for your target:

• Hardware - Allows the compiler to perform single precision floating point arithmetic, partially compliant with the IEEE 754.

• Software - Allows the compiler to implement both single and double precision floating point arithmetic, partially compliant with IEEE 754.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

33

CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard

Table 2-4. Build Settings Page (continued)

Option

Fused multiply and accumulate

Description

Both hardware floating point and software floating point are supported on B4420,

B4860, SC3900fp, and their derivatives. For more information on hardware and software floating point support, see StarCore C/C++ Compiler User Guide.

Enables fused multiply and add generation. Fused multiply and add are generated only if hardware floating point support is enabled on the SC3900fp compiler.

2.1.5 SmartDSP OS Page

Use this page to specify the SmartDSP OS support for your project.

Figure 2-5. CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard - SmartDSP OS Page

SmartDSP OS

Option

Table 2-5. SmartDSP OS Page Settings

Description

Specifies the SmartDSP operating system support for your project.

• Yes-Select to create a project that supports SmartDSP

OS.

• No-Select to create a project without SmartDSP OS support.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

34 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

2.2 Creating projects

This section explains you how to use the CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard to quickly create new projects with default settings (build and launch configurations).

This section explains:

•

Creating CodeWarrior Bareboard Project

2.2.1 Creating CodeWarrior Bareboard Project

You can create a CodeWarrior bareboard application project using the CodeWarrior

Bareboard Project Wizard.

To create a CodeWarrior bareboard application project, perform these steps:

NOTE

For details about the options in the CodeWarrior Bareboard

Project wizard pages, see the topic CodeWarrior Bareboard

Project Wizard .

1. Select Start > All Programs > Freescale CodeWarrior > CW for StarCore

3900FP vnumber > CodeWarrior IDE, where number is the version number of your product.

The Workspace Launcher dialog box appears, prompting you to select a workspace to use.

NOTE

Click Browse to change the default location for workspace folder. You can also select the Use this as the default and do not ask again checkbox to set default or selected path as the default location for storing all your projects.

2. Click OK.

The default workspace is accepted. The CodeWarrior IDE launches and the

Welcome page appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

35

Creating projects

NOTE

The Welcome page appears only if the CodeWarrior IDE or the selected workspace is started for the first time.

Otherwise, the Workbench window appears.

3. Click Go to Workbench from the Welcome page.

The workbench window appears.

4. Select File > New > CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard, from the

CodeWarrior IDE menu bar.

The CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard launches and the Create a

CodeWarrior Bareboard Project page appears.

5. Specify a name for the new project in the Project name text box.

For example, enter the project name as

Hello_World

.

6. If you do not want to create your project in the default workspace: a. Clear the Use default location checkbox.

b. Click Browse and select the desired location from the Browse For Folder dialog box.

c. In the Location text box, append the location with the name of the directory in which you want to create your project. In the Location text box, append the location with the name of the directory in which you want to create your project.

NOTE

An existing directory cannot be specified for the project location. If created, the CodeWarrior will prompt an error message.

7. Click Next.

The Processor page appears.

8. Select the target processor for the new project, from the Processor list.

9. Select Application from the Project Output group, to create an application with

.elf extension, that includes information required to debug the project.

10. Click Next.

The Debug Target Settings page appears.

11. Select a supported connection type (hardware, simulator, or emulator), from the

Debugger Connection Types group. Your selection determines the launch configurations that you can include in your project.

12. Select the board you are targeting, from the Board drop-down list.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

36 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

13. Select the launch configurations that you want to include in your project and the corresponding connection, from the Launch group.

NOTE

For more information on remote systems, see CodeWarrior

Development Studio Common Features Guide

.

14. Select the interface to communicate with the hardware, from the Connection Type drop-down list.

15. Enter the IP address of the TAP device in the TAP address text box. This option is available only if Ethernet TAP,CodeWarrior Ethernet TAP, or Gigabit TAP is selected as the connection type.

16. Click Next.

The Build Settings page appears.

17. Select the programming language, you want to use, from the Language group.

The language you select determines the libraries that are linked with your program and the contents of the main source file that the wizard generates.

NOTE

If you select C++, you can still add C source files to the project and vice versa.

18. Select a toolchain from the Toolchain group.

Selected toolchain sets up the default compiler, linker, and libraries used to build the new project. Each toolchain generates code targeted for a specific platform.

NOTE

If the toolchain you want to use is disabled, you have to install the corresponding Service Pack for adding the build tools support.

19. Select an option from the Floating Point drop-down list, to prompt the compiler to handle the floating-point operations by generating instructions for the selected floating-point unit.

20. Check the Fused multiple and accumulate checkbox to enable fused multiply and add generation.

NOTE

Fused multiply and add are generated only if hardware floating point support is enabled on the SC3900fp compiler.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

37

Importing Projects

NOTE

For more information on hardware and software floating point support and fused multiply and accumulate, see the

StarCore C/C++ Compiler User Guide

.

21. Click Next.

The SmartDSP OS page appears.

22. Select Yes to create a project that supports SmartDSP OS.

NOTE

SmartDSP OS support is currently available for the

Qonverge targets only.

23. Click Finish.

The wizard creates an application project according to your specifications. You can access the project from the CodeWarrior Projects view on the Workbench.

The new project is ready for use. You can now customize the project by adding your own source code files, changing debugger settings and adding libraries.

2.3 Importing Projects

This section explains how to import existing projects, such as SmartDSP in StarCore.

•

Importing SmartDSP OS Project

2.3.1 Importing SmartDSP OS Project

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSPs includes SmartDSP OS, a pre-emptable, real-time, priority-based operating system, specially designed for highperformance DSPs operating with tight memory requirements.

NOTE

SmartDSP OS support must be installed as part of the

CodeWarrior installation to be able to import and modify a

SmartDSP OS project.

To import an existing sample SmartDSP OS project and customize it, follow these steps:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

38 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

1. Select Start > Programs > Freescale CodeWarrior > CW for StarCore 3900FP

vnumber > CodeWarrior IDE, where number is the version number of your product.

The Workspace Launcher dialog box appears.

2. Click OK.

The default workspace is accepted. The CodeWarrior IDE launches and the

Welcome page appears.

NOTE

The Welcome page appears only if the CodeWarrior IDE or the selected Workspace is opened first time. Otherwise, the Workbench window appears.

3. Click Go to Workbench, on the Welcome page.

The Workbench window appears.

4. Select File > Import, from the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar.

The Import wizard appears.

5. Expand the General tree item.

6. Select Existing Projects into Workspace as shown in Figure 2-6 .

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

39

Importing Projects

Figure 2-6. Import Wizard - Select Existing Projects into Workspace

7. Click Next.

The Import Projects page appears.

8. Select the Select root directory option.

The wizard enables the corresponding Browse button.

NOTE

The Projects text box displays all the projects

available under the selected directory.

9. Click Browse.

The Browse For Folder dialog box appears.

10. Use the dialog box to navigate to the SmartDSP OS demo project you want to modify. For example, b4860\basic_demo\project

.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

40 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

NOTE

The SmartDSP OS demo projects are available in the

<CWInstallDir>\SC\StarCore_Support\SmartDSP\demos\starcore

\<platform>

folder, where

<CWInstallDir>

is the path to your

CodeWarrior installation.

11. Click OK.

The Browse For Folder dialog box closes. The path to the demo project appears in the Select root directory text box (

Figure 2-7 ).

Figure 2-7. Import Wizard - Import Existing Projects

12. Ensure that the project you want to import is selected.

13. Click Finish.

The Import wizard closes and the C/C++ perspective appears.

The CodeWarrior Projects view shows the selected SmartDSP OS project.

NOTE

To make your own project, rename the demo project directory and copy it to the

<CWInstallDir>\SC

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

41

Importing Projects

\StarCore_Support\SmartDSP\demos\starcore\<platform>

folder.

The projects in the renamed directory work because all project access paths are relative.

14. In the CodeWarrior Projects view, select the project to configure the build properties.

15. Select Project >Properties.

The Properties for <project> dialog box appears. The left side of this dialog box has a Properties list. This list shows the properties that apply to the selected project.

16. Expand the C/C++ Build property.

17. Select Settings.

18. Use the Configuration drop-down list to select the launch configuration for which you want to modify the build properties.

19. Click the Tool Settings tab.

The corresponding page appears.

20. From the list of tools on the Tool Settings page, expand the StarCore 3900 C/C++

Linker Application tree item.

21. The library build configuration options panel appears.

If you want to change these options, see the chapter Libraries.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

42 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

Figure 2-8. CodeWarrior Projects-Demo SmartDSP OS Project

22. Click Apply.

23. Click OK.

The Properties for <project> dialog box closes.

You just finished importing a sample SmartDSP OS project.

2.4 Building projects

CodeWarrior IDE supports two modes of building projects, manual-build mode and autobuild mode.

2.4.1 Manual-Build mode

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

43

Building projects

In large workspaces, building the entire workspace can take a long time if users make changes with a significant impact on dependent projects. Often there are only a few projects that really matter to a user at a given time.

To build only the selected projects, and any prerequisite projects that need to be built to correctly build the selected projects, select Project > Build Project from the

CodeWarrior IDE menu bar.

Figure 2-9. Project Menu- Build Project

Alternatively, right-click on the selected project in the CodeWarrior Projects view and select Build Project from the context menu.

Figure 2-10. Context Menu-Build Project

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

44 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 2 Working with Projects

To build all projects available in the CodeWarrior Projects view, select Project >

Build All.

Figure 2-11. Project Menu-Build All

2.4.2 Auto-Build mode

CodeWarrior IDE takes care of compiling source files automatically. When auto-build is enabled, project build occurs automatically in the background every time you change files in the workspace (for example saving an editor).

To automatically build all the projects in a workspace, select Project > Build

Automatically from the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar.

Figure 2-12. Project Menu-Build Automatically

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

45

Deleting Projects

If auto-build is taking too long and is interfering with ongoing development, it can be turned off. Select Project > Build Automatically from the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar to disable auto-build mode.

NOTE

It is advised that you do not use the Build Automatically option for C/C++ development. Using this option will result in building the entire project whenever you save a change to the makefile or source files. This can take a significant amount of time for very large projects.

2.5 Deleting Projects

Using the options available in CodeWarrior IDE, you can delete a project and optionally the resources linked to the project.

To delete a project, follow these steps:

1. Select the project you want to delete in the CodeWarrior Projects view.

2. Select Edit > Delete.

The Delete Resources dialog box appears.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can also select Delete from the context menu that appears when you right-click the project.

3. Select the Delete project contents on disk (cannot be undone) option to delete the project contents permanently.

NOTE

You will not be able to restore your project using Undo, if you select the Delete project contents on disk (cannot be

undone) option.

4. Click OK.

The selected project is deleted and relevant details of the project are removed from the

CodeWarrior Projects view.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

46 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3

Build Properties

This chapter explains build properties for StarCore projects. A project can contain multiple build and launch configurations.

A build configuration is a named collection of build tools options. The set of options in a given build configuration causes the build tools to generate a final binary with specific characteristics. For example, the binary produced by a Debug build configuration might contain symbolic debugging information and have no optimizations, while the binary product by a Release build configuration might contain no symbolics and be highly optimized.

NOTE

The settings of the CodeWarrior IDE's build and launch configuration correspond to an object called a target made by the classic CodeWarrior IDE.

This chapter explains:

•

Changing Build Properties

•

Restoring Build Properties

•

Build Properties for StarCore

3.1 Changing Build Properties

You can modify the build properties of a project to better suit your needs.

Follow these steps to change build properties:

1. Start the CodeWarrior IDE.

2. In the CodeWarrior Projects view, select the project for which you want to modify the build properties.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

47

Restoring Build Properties

3. Select Project > Properties.

The Properties for <project> dialog box appears. The left side of this window has a

Properties list. This list shows the build properties that apply to the current project.

4. Expand the C/C++ Build property node.

5. Select Settings.

6. Use the Configuration drop-down list to specify the launch configuration for which you want to modify the build properties.

7. Click the Tool Settings tab. The corresponding page appears.

8. From the list of tools on the Tool Settings page, select the tool for which you want to modify properties.

9. Change the settings as per the requirements.

10. Click Apply.

The CodeWarrior IDE saves your new settings.

You can select other tool pages and modify their settings. When you finish, click OK to save your changes and close the Properties for <project> dialog box.

3.2 Restoring Build Properties

You can modify a build configuration of a project and restore it back in order to have a factory-default configuration, or to revert to a last-known working build configuration.

To undo your modifications to build properties, click the Restore Defaults button at the bottom of the Properties for<project> dialog box.

This changes the values of the options to the absolute default of the toolchain. By default, the toolchain options are blank.

3.3 Build Properties for StarCore

The Properties for <project> dialog box shows the corresponding build properties for a

StarCore project.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

48 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-1. Properties for <Project> Dialog Box

Table 3-1

lists the build tool settings specific to developing software for StarCore.

StarCore 3900 C/C++ Compiler

Table 3-1. Build Tool Settings for StarCore

Build Tool

StarCore Environment

StarCore 3900 Disassembler

StarCore 3900 C/C++ Linker Application

Build Properties Panels

Disassembler Settings

Linker Settings

C/C++ Options

Libraries

C/C++ Language

Control

Hardware Configuration

Output Listing

Warnings

Compiler Front End Messages

Assembler

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

49

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-1. Build Tool Settings for StarCore (continued)

StarCore 3900 Assembler

Build Tool

StarCore 3900 Preprocessor

Build Properties Panels

Linker

Include Search Paths

Macros

Processor

Optimization

Configuration Files

Additional Arguments

Code and Language Options

Include Search Paths

Preprocessor

Listing File

Listing Contents

Listing Format

Additional Arguments

Preprocessor Settings

The CodeWarrior build tools listed in

Table 3-1 share some properties panels, such as the

Include Search Paths. The properties that you specify in these panels apply to the selected build tool on the Tool Settings page of the Properties for <project> dialog box.

3.3.1 StarCore Environment

Use this panel to specify the StarCore architecture for the build and the memory model that the architecture uses.

The build tools (compiler, linker, and assembler) use the properties that you specify on this page.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

50 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-2. Tool Settings - StarCore Environment

Table 3-2

describes the various options available on the StarCore Environment panel.

Architecture

Memory Model

Table 3-2. Tool Settings - StarCore Environment Options

Option Description

Specify the StarCore architecture for which you build your project.

Specify the memory model for the build tools:

• Small Memory Model-absolute addresses fit in 64KB

• Big Memory Model-absolute addresses do not fit in

64KB, but fit in 1MB

• Big Memory Model w/ Far RT Lib Calls-Absolute addresses do not fit in 64KB, but fit in 1MB. The build tools make runtime-library calls in the same manner they do for the huge memory model.

• Huge Memory Model-absolute addresses do not fit in

1MB

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

51

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-2. Tool Settings - StarCore Environment Options (continued)

Force C++ Compilation

Floating Point

Option Description

Checked -Enforce C++ compilation for the files that do not have the .cpp extension. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -force c++ command-line option. Cleared -

C++ compilation is not enforced for the files that do not have the .cpp extension.

Specify floating point type for the project, Hardware or

Software. Both hardware floating point and software floating point are supported on B4420, B4860, SC3900fp, and their derivatives.

3.3.2 StarCore 3900 Disassembler

Use this panel to specify the command, options, and expert settings for the StarCore 3900 disassembler.

Figure 3-3. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 Disassembler

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

52 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-3

describes the various options available on the StarCore 3900 Disassembler panel.

Command

All options

Table 3-3. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 Disassembler Options

Expert Settings:

Command line pattern

Option Description

Shows the location of the disassembler executable file.

Shows the actual command line the disassembler will be called with.

Shows the expert settings command line parameters; default is "${SCToolsInstallDir}${COMMAND}" ${FLAGS} $

{INPUTS}.

3.3.2.1 Disassembler Settings

Use this panel to specify the Disassembler behavior.

Figure 3-4. Tool Settings - Disassembler Settings

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

53

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-4

describes the various options available on the Disassembler Settings panel.

Compact

Start Label

End Label

Start Address (Hex)

End Address (Hex)

Verbose

Table 3-4. Tool Settings - Disassembler Settings Options

Print loopstart - loopend

Suppress Banner

Ignore Relocation Information

Display Unmangled C++ Names

Suppress PC

Suppress Label and Header

Option

Display Mixed Hexadecimal and Assembly

Description

Specifies compact output mode.

Checked - The disassembler prints instructions in an execution -set on a single line.

Cleared - The disassembler does not print instructions in an execution -set on a single line.

Specifies the label at which disassembly of the input file starts.

Specifies the label at which disassembly of the input file ends.

Specifies the hexadecimal address at which the disassembly starts.

Specifies the hexadecimal address at which the disassembly ends.

Checked - The disassembler prints loopstart-loopend directives.

Cleared - The disassembler prints lpmarka/lpmarkb directives.

Checked - The disassembler suppresses display of banner information.

Cleared - The disassembler does not suppress banner display.

Checked - The disassembler ignores the relocation information relevant to .eln and .elb files.

Cleared - Disassembler does not ignore the relocation information.

Checked - The disassembler displays unmangled form of C+

+ names.

Cleared - The disassembler does not display unmangled form of C++ names.

Checked - The disassembler suppresses the PC display for

VLES.

Cleared - The disassembler does not supress the PC display for VLES.

Checked - The disassembler suppresses display of labels, headers, and global information ( equs, globals, and section information).

Cleared - The disassembler does not supress display of labels and header information.

Checked - The disassembler displays mixed hexadecimal codification and assembly code.

Cleared - The disassembler does not display mixed hexadecimal codification and assembly code.

Checked - Enables verbose mode.

Cleared - Does not enable verbose mode.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

54 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-4. Tool Settings - Disassembler Settings Options (continued)

Display Statistics

Option Description

Checked - The disassembler displays statistics after each section, which includes but not limited to: number of VLES with 0 - 4 DALU instructions, number of VLES with 0 - 2

AGU instructions, not-generated instructions.

Cleared - The disassembler does not display statistics after each section.

3.3.3 StarCore 3900 C/C++ Linker Application

Use this panel to specify the command, options, and expert settings for the build tool linker.

Figure 3-5. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 C/C++ Linker Application

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

55

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-5

describes the various options available on the StarCore 3900 C/C++ Linker

Application panel.

Table 3-5. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 C/C++ Linker Application Options

Command

All options

Expert Settings

Command line pattern

Option Description

Shows the location of the linker executable file.

Shows the actual command line the linker will be called with.

Shows the expert settings command line parameters; default is "${SCToolsInstallDir}${COMMAND}" ${FLAGS} $

{OUTPUT_FLAG} ${OUTPUT_PREFIX}${OUTPUT} $

{INPUTS}.

3.3.3.1 Linker Settings

Use this panel to specify the linker behavior.

For C and C++ source files, build tools optimize the output object code. The build tools do not optimize hand-coded assembly language.

Figure 3-6. Tool Settings - Linker Settings

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

56 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-6

describes the various options available on the Linker Settings panel.

Map File

Strip Dead Code

Linker Command File

Additional Options

Table 3-6. Tool Settings - Linker Settings Options

Option Description

Enter the path of the file to which the linker writes memorymap information. This filename must have a .map extension.

Checked - The linker removes both unreferenced source code and unreferenced data from your program. Enabling this option reduces your program's memory footprint.

Cleared - The linker preserves both unreferenced source code and unreferenced data in your program.

Enter the path of the linker-command file that the build tools use for processing your project. Alternatively, click the

Browse button, then use the resulting dialog box to specify the linker command file.

Enter additional linker command-line options. The IDE passes these options to the scc shell during the link phase. Note that the IDE passes command-line options to the scc shell exactly as you enter them in this text box.

3.3.3.2 C/C++ Options

Use this panel to specify linker behavior.

For C and C++ source files, the build tools optimize output object code. The build tools do not optimize hand-coded assembly language.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

57

Build Properties for StarCore

Figure 3-7. Tool Settings - C/C++ Options

Table 3-7

describes the various options available on the C/C++ Options panel.

Table 3-7. Tool Settings - C/C++ Options

Option

Use Re-entrant Runtime Libraries

Custom Start-Up File

Description

Checked - The linker uses the correct thread-safe libraries and start-up code for your target architecture. If checked, the

IDE passes -reentrant to the scc shell.

Cleared - The linker uses default libraries and startup code.

Enter the path to a custom start-up file that the linker uses instead of a default start-up file. Alternatively, click the Browse button, then use the resulting dialog box to specify the custom start-up file. Leave this text box blank to have the linker use a default start-up file.

3.3.3.3 Libraries

Use this panel to specify additional libraries that the StarCore C/C++ Linker should use.

You can specify multiple additional libraries and library search paths. Also, you can change the order in which the IDE uses or searches the libraries.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

58 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-8. Tool Settings - Libraries

Table 3-8

describes the various options available on the Libraries panel.

Table 3-8. Tool Settings - Libraries

Additional Libraries

Library Search Paths

Option Description

Lists paths to additional libraries that the StarCore C/C++ linker uses. The linker uses the libraries in the order shown in this list.

Lists paths that the StarCore C/C++ linker searches for libraries. The linker searches the paths in the order shown in this list.

Table 3-9

lists and describes the toolbar buttons that help work with the libraries.

Table 3-9. Tool Settings - Libraries Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Add - Click to open the Add file path or the Add directory

path dialog box and create a file or directory path.

Delete - Click to delete the selected file or directory. To confirm deletion, click

Yes in the Confirm Delete dialog box.

Edit - Click to open the Edit file path or Edit directory path dialog box and update the selected file or directory.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

59

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-9. Tool Settings - Libraries Toolbar Buttons (continued)

Button Description

Move up - Click to move the selected file search path one position higher in the list.

Move down - Click to move the selected file search path one position lower in the list.

3.3.4 StarCore 3900 C/C++ Compiler

Use this panel to specify the command, options, and expert settings for the build tool compiler.

Figure 3-9. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 C/C++ Compiler

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

60 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-10 describes the various options available on the StarCore 3900 C/C++

Compiler panel.

Command

All options

Table 3-10. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 C/C++ Compiler Options

Expert Settings

Command line pattern

Option Description

Shows the location of the linker executable file.

Shows the actual command line the compiler will be called with.

Shows the expert settings command line parameters; default is "${SCToolsInstallDir}${COMMAND}" ${FLAGS} -o

${OUTPUT_PREFIX}${OUTPUT} -c ${INPUTS}.

3.3.4.1 C/C++ Language

Use this panel to direct the CodeWarrior C/C++ compiler to apply specific processing modes to your C/C++ language source code. The C/C++ compiler's default state is

ANSI/ISO mode with extensions.

The C/C++ compiler treats the settings of this panel as one collection. You can compile source files with just one collection at a time. To compile source files with multiple collections, you must compile the source code sequentially. After each compile iteration, you change the collection of settings that the C/C++ compiler uses.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

61

Build Properties for StarCore

Figure 3-10. Tool Settings - C/C++ Language

Table 3-11 describes the various options available on the C/C++ Language panel.

Strict ANSI mode

Type 'char' is signed

64-Bit Data Type Support

Table 3-11. Tool Settings - C/C++ Language Options

Option Description

Checked - The C/C++ compiler operates in strict ANSI mode.

In this mode, the compiler strictly applies the rules of the

ANSI/ISO specification to all input files. This setting is equivalent to specifying the - ansi command-line option.

The compiler issues a warning for each ANSI/ISO extension it finds.

Cleared - The C/C++ compiler does not operate in strict ANSI mode.

Checked - The C/C++ compiler treats all char data types as signed. This setting is the default.

Cleared - The C/C++ compiler treats all char data types as unsigned (as if you had declared them unsigned char).

This setting is equivalent to specifying the -usc command line option.

Checked - The C/C++ compiler supports 64-bit data types long long and double. A long long is a 64-bit integer. A double is a 64-bit double-precision floating-point value.

Cleared - The C/C++ compiler does not support data types long long and double.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

62 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

3.3.4.2 Control

Use this panel to control compiler and shell behavior. You can specify command-line options to pass to the compiler and whether to generate debugging information.

Figure 3-11. Tool Settings - Control

Table 3-12 describes the various options available on the Control panel.

Read Options from File

Table 3-12. Tool Settings - Control Options

Options Description

Enter the path to a file that contains compiler command-line options. Alternatively, click

Browse and use the resulting dialog box to specify the file. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -F file command-line option. The filename must use the .opt extension. The shell treats the options in this file as if you had passed them on the command line. Each

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

63

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-12. Tool Settings - Control Options (continued)

Options

Generate Debugging Information

Description

time you invoke the compiler, you can select a file with the set of options that suits your needs. Note that the IDE does not verify the validity of the options in the file.

Checked - The compiler produces symbolic information for debugging the build target.

Cleared - The compiler does not produce symbolic information.

3.3.4.3 Hardware Configuration

Use this panel to control how the compiler structures generated object code. You can specify whether to initialize variables from read-only memory (ROM).

Figure 3-12. Tool Settings - Hardware Configuration

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

64 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-13 describes the various options available on the Hardware Configuration panel.

Table 3-13. Tool Settings - Hardware Configuration Options

Option

Initialize Variables from ROM

Description

Checked - The compiler places the initialization data for your program's global variables in a separate section. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -mrom command-line option.

The IDE can manipulate the section at link time and at load time.

Cleared - The compiler bypasses placing the initialization data for your program's global variables in a separate section.

You can clear this checkbox as you develop your source code, because a separate loader program handles initializing your program's global variables. After you finish development, you can check this checkbox, then place into ROM the segment with the initialization data for your global variables.

3.3.4.4 Output Listing

Use this panel to control how the compiler formats the listing file, as well as error and warning messages.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

65

Build Properties for StarCore

Figure 3-13. Tool Settings - Output Listing

Table 3-14 describes the various options available on the Output Listing panel.

Verbosity

Table 3-14. Tool Settings - Output Listing Options

Option

Create File with Error Output

Description

Specify the amount of information that the compiler generates:

• Quiet - The IDE displays just error messages that the compiler emits. The IDE suppresses warning and informational messages. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -q command-line option.

•

Default - The IDE chooses whether to use Quiet or

Verbose.

•

Verbose - The IDE shows each command line that it passes to the shell, along with all progress, error, warning, and informational messages that the tools emit. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -v command-line option.

Checked - The IDE generates a file that contains error messages that the compiler outputs.

Cleared - The IDE does not generate a file that contains error messages.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

66 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-14. Tool Settings - Output Listing Options (continued)

Keep assembly (.sl) files

Option

Define Struct Fd Offsets as EQUs

Description

Checked - The compiler keeps the intermediate assemblylanguage source files ( .sl files) it creates, instead of deleting them. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -s command-line option. The compiler generates one .sl file for each C source file in the build target.

Cleared - The compiler discards the intermediate assemblylanguage source files it creates.

Checked - The compiler includes the offsets of C datastructure field definitions in each generated intermediate assembly-language source file. This setting is equivalent to specifying the - do command-line option.

Cleared - The compiler does not include the offsets of C datastructure field definitions in each generated intermediate assembly-language source file.

3.3.4.5 Warnings

Use this panel to control how the compiler reports the error and warning messages.

Figure 3-14. Tool Settings - Warnings

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

67

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-15 describes the various options available on the Warning panel.

Report All Warnings

Generate Wrapper Remarks

Generate Wrapper Warnings

Table 3-15. Tool Settings - Warning Options

Option Description

Specifies global remark/warning control. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -W command-line option.

Checked-The IDE generates a file that contains Wrapper remarks that the compiler outputs. Cleared-The IDE does not generate a file that contains Wrapper remarks.

Checked-The IDE generates a file that contains Wrapper warnings that the compiler outputs. Cleared-The IDE does not generate a file that contains Wrapper remarks.

3.3.4.5.1 Compiler Front End Messages

Use this panel to control how the compiler generates compiler-front-end warnings.

Figure 3-15. Tool Settings - Compiler Front End Messages

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

68 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-16 describes the various options available on the Compiler Front End

Messages panel.

Extra Commas

Invalid Pragmas

Table 3-16. Tool Settings - Compiler Front End Messages Options

Option

Report All Compiler Front End Warnings

Treat Warnings As Errors

Any Pointer-to-Integer Conversions

Lossy Pointer-to- Integer Conversions

Command-Line Driver/Parser Warnings

Display List of Active Warnings

Empty Declarations

Pedantic Error Checking

Incorrect Capitalization In #include "...."

Incorrect Capitalization In #include <....>

Hidden Virtual Functions

Description

Specifies global Compiler Front End warning control. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe or -Wnomwfe command-line options.

Activates or deactivates treatment of compiler-front-end warnings as errors.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about any pointer-to-integer conversions. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-anyptrintconv or -Wnomwfeanyptrintconv command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about lossy pointer-to-integer conversions.

Activates or deactivates generation of command-line driver/ parser warnings. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -

Wmwfe-cmdline or -Wnomwfe-cmdline command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about extra commas. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfecomma or -Wnomwfe-comma command-line options.

Activates or deactivates display of archive warnings list. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-display or -

Wnomwfe-display command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about empty declarations. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -

Wmwfe-emptydecl or -Wnomwfe-emptydecl commandline options.

Activates or deactivates pedantic error checking. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-pedantic or -

Wnomwfe-pedantic command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about incorrect capitalization in #include "...". This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-filecaps or -

Wnomwfe-filecaps command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about incorrect capitalization in #include <...>. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-sysfilecaps or -

Wnomwfe-sysfilecaps command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about hidden virtual functions. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -

Wmwfe-hidenvirtual or -Wnomwfe-hidevirtual command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about invalid pragmas. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfeillpragmas or -Wnomwfe-illpragmas command-line options.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

69

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-16. Tool Settings - Compiler Front End Messages Options (continued)

Implicit Integer-to-Floating-Point or Floating-Point-to-Integer

Conversions

Option

Implicit Floating-Point-to-Integer Conversions

Implicit Integer-to-Floating-Point Conversions

Implicit Signed/Unsigned Conversions

Passing Large Arguments to Unprototyped Functions

Returning Without Values in Non-Void-Returning Function

`inline' Functions Not Inlined

Result of Non-Void-Returning Function Not Being Used

Padding Added Between Struct Members

Possible Unwanted Side Effects

Inconsistent Use of Class and Struct

Tokens Not Formed By The ## Operator

Description

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about implicit integer-to-floating-point or floating-point-to-integer conversions. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -

Wmwfe-implicitconv(or -Wmwfe-implicit) or -

Wnomwfe-implicitconv(or -Wnomwfe-implicit) command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about implicit floating-point-to-integer conversions. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-float2int or -Wnomwfefloat2int command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about implicit integer-to-floating-point conversions. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-int2float or -Wnomwfeint2float command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about implicit signed/unsigned conversions. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-impl_signedunsigned or -

Wnomwfe-impl_signedunsigned command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about passing large arguments to unprototyped functions. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-largeargs or -

Wnomwfe-largeargs command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about returns without values in non-void-returning functions. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-missingreturn or -

Wnomwfe-missingreturn command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about `inline' functions not inlined. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-notinlined or -Wnomwfe-notinlined command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about result of non-void-returning function not being used. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-notused or -

Wnomwfe-notused command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about padding added between struct members. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-padding or -

Wnomwfe-padding command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about padding added between struct members. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-padding or -

Wnomwfe-padding command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about inconsistent use of class and struct. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-structclass or -Wnomwfestructclass command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about tokens not formed by the ## operator. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-tokenpasting or -Wnomwfetokenpasting command-line options.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

70 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-16. Tool Settings - Compiler Front End Messages Options (continued)

Option

Undefined Macros In #if/#else Conditionals

Unused Variables

Unused Arguments

Using Expressions As Statements Without Side Effects

Overriding Function Has No `virtual' Keyword

Variables Uninitialized Before Used

Hidden Local Variables

Missing Enum Case Labels

Description

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about undefined macros in #if/#else conditionals. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe--undefmacro (or -

Wmwfe-undef) or -Wnomwfe-undefmacro (or -

Wnomwfe-undef) command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about unused variables. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfeunusedvar or -Wnomwfe-unusedvar command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about unused arguments. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -

Wmwfe-unusedarg or -Wnomwfe-unusedarg commandline options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about using expressions as statements without side effects. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-unusedexpr or -

Wnomwfe-unusedexpr command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about overriding function that has no `virtual' keyword.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about variables uninitialized before used. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wmwfe-unused or -Wnomwfe-unused command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about hidden local variables. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -

Wmwfe-hidden or -Wnomwfe-hidden command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about missing

Enum case labels.

3.3.4.5.2 Assembler

Use this panel to control how the compiler generates FALIGN, assembler remarks and warnings.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

71

Build Properties for StarCore

Figure 3-16. Tool Settings - Assembler

Table 3-17 describes the various options available on the Assembler panel.

All Assembler warnings

FALIGN Remarks

Assembler Remarks

Assembler Warnings

Table 3-17. Tool Settings - Assembler Options

Option Description

Specifies global Assembler warning control. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wasm or -Wnoasm commandline options.

Activates or deactivates generation of FALIGN remarks. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wasm-falign or -

Wnoasm-falign command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of assembler remarks.

This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wasm-remarks or -Wnoasm-remarks command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of assembler warnings.

This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wasm-warnings or -Wnoasm-warnings command-line options.

3.3.4.5.3 Linker

Use this panel to control how the compiler generates all linker warnings.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

72 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-17. Tool Settings - Linker

Table 3-18 describes the various options available on the Linker panel.

All Linker Warnings

Table 3-18. Tool Settings - Linker Options

Option

SHT_NOBITS (.bss) Section Precedes SHT_PROGBITS

(data/text) Sections

Recursive Function Calls Make Stack-Effect Computation An

Estimate

Description

Specifies global Linker warning control. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wlnk or -Wnolnk commandline options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings if

SHT_NOBITS (.bss) section precedes SHT_PROGBITS

(data/text) sections in the segment. By default, this option is turned on. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wlnkprogbits-after-nobits or -Wnolnk-progbitsafter-nobits command-line options.

Activates or deactivates generation of warnings about if recursive function calls make stack-effect computation an estimate. By default, this option is turned on. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Wlnk-stack-effect or -

Wnolnk-stack-effect command-line options.

3.3.4.6 Include Search Paths

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

73

Build Properties for StarCore

Use this panel to specify paths to search for

#include

files. Note that the IDE displays an error message if a header file is in a different directory from the referencing source file.

Sometimes, the IDE also displays an error message if a header file is in the same directory as the referencing source file.

For example, if you see the message

Could not open source file myfile.h

, you must add the path for myfile.h

to this panel.

Figure 3-18. Tool Settings - Include Search Paths

Table 3-19 lists and describes the toolbar buttons that help work with the file search

paths.

Table 3-19. Tool Settings - Include Search Paths Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Add - Click to open the

Add directory path dialog box

(

Figure 3-19 ) and specify the file search path.

Delete - Click to delete the selected file search path. To confirm deletion, click Yes in the Confirm Delete dialog box.

Edit - Click to open the Edit directory path dialog box (

Figure

3-20

) and update the selected object file search path.

Move up - Click to move the selected file search path one position higher in the list.

Move down - Click to move the selected file search path one position lower in the list.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

74 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Figure 3-19 shows the Add directory path dialog box.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-19. Add directory path Dialog Box

Figure 3-20 shows the Edit directory path dialog box.

Figure 3-20. Edit directory path Dialog Box

The buttons in the Add directory path and Edit directory path dialog boxes help work with the object file search paths.

• OK- Click to confirm the action and exit the dialog box.

• Cancel - Click to cancel the action and exit the dialog box.

• Workspace- Click to display the Folder Selection dialog box and specify the object file search path. The resulting path, relative to the workspace, appears in the appropriate list.

• File system- Click to display the Browse for Folder dialog box and specify the object file search path. The resulting path appears in the appropriate list.

3.3.4.7 Macros

Use this panel to define and undefine preprocessor macros. You can specify multiple macros and change the order in which the IDE uses the macros.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

75

Build Properties for StarCore

Figure 3-21. Tool Settings - Macros

Table 3-20 describes the various options available on the Macros panel.

Table 3-20. Tool Settings - Macros Options

Option

Define Preprocessor Macros

Undefine Preprocessor Macros

Description

Define preprocessor macros and optionally assign their values. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -D name[=value] command-line option. To assign a value, use the equal sign (=) with no white space. For example, this syntax defines a preprocessor value named

EXTENDED_FEATURE and assigns ON as its value:

EXTENDED_FEATURE=ON

Note that if you do not assign a value to the macro, the shell assigns a default value of 1.

Undefine preprocessor macros. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -U name command-line option. For example, this syntax undefines the EXTENDED_ FEATURE macro:

EXTENDED_FEATURE

Note that the shell processes these items after it processes all

Defined Preprocessor Macros items.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

76 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-21 lists and describes the toolbar buttons that help work with the macros.

Table 3-21. Tool Settings - Macros Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Add - Click to add a defined preprocessor macro.

Delete - Click to delete the selected macro. To confirm deletion, click Yes in the Confirm Delete dialog box.

Edit - Click to update the selected defined preprocessor macro.

Move up - Click to move the selected macro one position higher in the list.

Move down - Click to move the selected macro one position lower in the list.

3.3.4.8 Processor

Use this panel to enable fused multiply and accumulate operation.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

77

Build Properties for StarCore

Figure 3-22. Tool Settings - Processor Panel

Table 3-22 explains the options available on the Processor panel.

Option

Fused multiply and accumulate

Table 3-22. Tool Settings - Processor

Description

Check to enable the fused multiply and accumulate operation.

Fused multiply and add are generated only if hardware floating point support is enabled on the SC3900fp compiler.

3.3.4.9 Optimization

Use this panel to control compiler optimizations. Compiler optimization can be applied in either global or non-global optimization mode. You can apply global optimization at the end of the development cycle, after compiling and optimizing all source files individually or in groups.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

78 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-23. Tool Settings - Optimization

Table 3-23 describes the various options available on the Optimization panel.

Alignment

Table 3-23. Tool Settings - Optimization Options

Option Description

Specify the alignment level that the compiler uses. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -align level commandline option.

• default - level 0 applies to size optimizations, and level

2 applies to speed optimizations

• 0 - disable alignment

•

1 - align hardware loops

• 2 - align hardware and software loops

•

3 - align all existing labels

• 4 - align all existing labels and subroutine-return points

Optimization Level

Note that using a higher alignment constraint increases execution speed but also increases object-code size.

Specify the optimizations that you want the compiler to apply to the generated object code:

•

0 - Disable optimizations. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -O0 command-line option. The compiler generates unoptimized, linear assembly-language code.

•

1 - The compiler performs all target-independent (that is, non-parallelized) optimizations, such as function inlining. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -O1 command-line option.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

79

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-23. Tool Settings - Optimization Options (continued)

Option Description

The compiler omits all target-specific optimizations and generates linear assembly-language code.

• 2 - The compiler performs all optimizations (both targetindependent and target-specific). This setting is equivalent to specifying the -O2 command-line option.

The compiler outputs optimized, non-linear, parallelized assembly-language code.

• 3 - The compiler performs all the level 2 optimizations, then the low-level optimizer performs global-algorithm register allocation. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -O3 command-line option.

At this optimization level, the compiler generates code that is usually faster than the code generated from level

2 optimizations.

• 4 - The compiler performs all the level 3 optimizations, then the low-level optimizer performs global-algorithm register allocation. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -O4 command-line option.

At this optimization level, the compiler generates code that is usually faster than the code generated from level

3 optimizations.

Optimize For

Type-Based Alias Analysis

Global Optimization

To specify this setting, specify an Optimization Level greater than 0. Specify the goal of the optimizations that the compiler performs:

•

Faster Execution Speed - The compiler optimizes object code at the specified Optimization Level such that the resulting binary file has a faster execution speed, as opposed to a smaller executable code size.

•

Smaller Code Size - The compiler optimizes object code at the specified Optimization Level such that the resulting binary file has a smaller executable code size, as opposed to a faster execution speed. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Os command-line option.

Instructs the compiler to use alias by type rules for alias analysis. As per alias by type rules, a value which is stored in memory should always be accessed using the same access size or through a signed/unsigned char*. For more information, see Chapter 6.5, Paragraph 7 in C99 Standard document.

To specify this setting, specify an Optimization Level greater than 0.

Checked - The compiler applies the selected optimizations across all files in the build target. This global optimization is the most effective. This setting is equivalent to specifying the

-cfe compiler command-line option followed by the -Og linkphase command-line option.

Cleared - The compiler creates intermediate files that have the .obj file extension.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

80 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

3.3.4.10 Configuration Files

Use this panel to specify the application-configuration file view, and the custom application-configuration file.

Figure 3-24. Tool Settings - Configuration Files

Table 3-24 describes the various options available on the Configuration Files panel.

Configuration View

Table 3-24. Tool Settings - Configuration Files Options

Option

Application Configuration File

Description

Enter the application-configuration file view that the build target uses. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -view identifier command-line option. If you use this text box, you must specify a path in the Application Configuration File text box.

Enter the path to a custom application-configuration file. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -ma filename command line option. Alternatively, click the Browse button, then use the resulting dialog box to specify the file. Clear this text box to use a default application-configuration file. Use a custom application-configuration file to apply different settings

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

81

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-24. Tool Settings - Configuration Files Options

Option Description

and optimization levels to various files and functions of the build target. An application-configuration file must have the .appli filename extension.

3.3.4.11 Additional Arguments

Use this panel to specify command-line options that the shell program (scc) passes directly to individual build tools (such as the front-end compiler, the various optimizers, and the assembler). Because the IDE shares this panel among multiple tools, just the options that apply to the selected tool appear in each instance of the panel.

NOTE

The IDE applies the command-line options that you specify in this panel to the compilation of the C-language source files in a build target (even the options that you enter in the To

Assembler text box). To pass command-line options to the assembler for application to the assembly-language files in a build target, use the Read Options from File text box of the

StarCore 3900 Assembler > Preprocessor panel.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

82 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-25. Tool Settings - Additional Arguments

Table 3-25 describes the various options available on the Additional Arguments panel.

Table 3-25. Tool Settings - Additional Arguments Options

To Front-End

To Assembler

To Shell

Option Description

Enter command-line options for the shell program to pass to the front-end compiler. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -Xcfe command-line option.

Enter command-line options for the shell program to pass to the assembler. This setting is equivalent to specifying the -

Xasm command-line option.

Enter command-line options for the IDE to pass to the shell program. The IDE passes the options exactly as you type them and does not check for errors.

3.3.5 StarCore 3900 Assembler

Use this panel to specify the command, options, and expert settings for the build tool assembler.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

83

Build Properties for StarCore

Figure 3-26. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 Assembler

Table 3-26 describes the various options available on the StarCore 3900 Assembler

options.

Command

All options

Table 3-26. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 Assembler Options

Expert Settings

Command line pattern

Option Description

Shows the location of the assembler executable file.

Shows the actual command line the assembler will be called with.

Shows the expert settings command line parameters; default is "${SCToolsInstallDir}${COMMAND}" ${FLAGS} $

{OUTPUT_FLAG}${OUTPUT_PREFIX}${OUTPUT} $

{INPUTS}.

3.3.5.1 Code and Language Options

Use this panel to specify code- and symbol-generation options for the StarCore assembler.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

84 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-27. Tool Settings - Code and Language Options

Table 3-27 describes the various options available on the Code and Language Options

panel.

Table 3-27. Tool Settings - Code and Language Options

Option

Generate Debugging Information

Ignore Case in Symbol Names

Write Symbols to Object File

Description

Checked - The assembler produces symbolic information for debugging the build target.

Cleared - The assembler does not produce symbolic information.

Checked - The assembler ignores the case of symbol, section, and macro names. This setting corresponds to the IC option of the OPT directive and to the -oic command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler considers the case of symbol, section, and macro names.

Checked - The assembler writes symbol information to the object files that it generates. This setting corresponds to the

SO option of the OPT directive and to the -oso commandline option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write symbol information to assembler-generated object files.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

85

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-27. Tool Settings - Code and Language Options (continued)

Option

Enable Check Summing

Continue Check Summing

Do Not Restrict Directives in Loops

Pack Strings

Scan MACLIB for Include Files

Enable Cycle Counts

Description

Checked - The assembler allows check-summing of instruction and data values and clearing the cumulative checksum.

Cleared - The assembler does not allow check summing of instruction and data values. You can use the @CHK() function to obtain the checksum value.

Note that the assembler never preserves a comment line in a macro definition that starts with two consecutive semicolons

(;;). This setting corresponds to the CK option of the OPT directive and to the -ock command-line option.

Checked-The assembler re-enables check summing of instructions and data. This setting corresponds to the CONTCK option of the OPT directive and to the -ocontck commandline option. Checking this checkbox does not cause the assembler to clear the cumulative checksum value. Cleared-

The assembler does not re-enable check summing of instructions and data.

Checked - The assembler suppresses error messages related to directives that might be invalid in DO loops. This setting corresponds to the DLD option of the OPT directive and to the -odld command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler generates error messages related to directives that might be invalid in DO loops.

Checked - The assembler packs strings that appear in the

Define Constant ( DC) directive. This setting corresponds to the PS option of the OPT directive and to the -ops commandline option. The assembler packs individual bytes of strings into consecutive target words for the length of the string.

Cleared - The assembler does not pack strings that appear in the DC directive.

Checked - The assembler searches for #include files in the paths shown in the Macro Library (MACLIB) Search Paths list,

as well as the paths shown in the Include Search Paths panel

of the StarCore Assembler. This setting corresponds to the MI option of the OPT directive and to the -omi command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler searches for include files just in the paths shown in the

Include Search Paths

panel of the

StarCore Assembler.

Checked - The assembler enables the cycle counter and clear-total-cycle-count features. This setting corresponds to the CC option of the OPT directive and to the -occ commandline option. Checking this checkbox causes the listing file to show a cycle count for each instruction entry.

Cleared - The assembler disables the cycle counter.

Note that cycle counts assume a full instruction-fetch pipeline and no wait states.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

86 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-27. Tool Settings - Code and Language Options (continued)

Option

Preserve Comment Lines in Macros

Make All Section Symbols Global

Perform Interrupt Location Checks

Expand Define Symbols in Strings

Preserve Object File on Errors

Dynamic Programming Rule Checks

Macro Library (MACLIB) Search Paths

Description

Checked - The assembler preserves comment lines in macros. This setting corresponds to the CM option of the OPT directive and to the -ocm command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not preserve comment lines in macros.

Checked - The assembler treats all sections as if you had declared them explicitly as GLOBAL sections. This setting corresponds to the GL option of the OPT directive and to the ogl command-line option. You must check this checkbox before explicitly defining any section in a source file.

Cleared - The assembler does not treat all sections as if you had declared them explicitly as GLOBAL sections.

Checked-The assembler checks for DSP instructions that cannot appear in the interrupt-vector locations of program memory. This setting corresponds to the INTR option of the

OPT directive and to the - ointr command-line option.

Cleared-The assembler does not check for DSP instructions that cannot appear in the interrupt- vector locations of program memory.

Checked - The assembler expands DEFINE symbols in strings. This setting corresponds to the DEX option of the OPT directive and to the -odex command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not expand DEFINE symbols in strings.

Checked - The assembler preserves object files if assembly errors occur. This setting corresponds to the SVO option of the OPT directive and to the - osvo command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler discards object files if assembly errors occur.

Specify how the assembler reports violations of programming rules:

·

Disable All - The assembler does not report violations of dynamic StarCore 3900FP DSP programming rules. This setting is the default behavior when you invoke the assembler from the command line.

·

Default - The assembler chooses whether to report violations of dynamic StarCore 3900FP DSP programming rules.

Enable All - The assembler reports violations of dynamic

StarCore 3900FP DSP programming rules. The IDE passes the -s all option to the assembler.

Lists paths to search for #include files. The assembler searches the paths in the order shown in this list. Use these toolbar buttons to work with the search paths:

• Add - Click, then use the resulting dialog box to specify the path.

• Delete - Click to remove the selected path.

•

Edit - Click, then use the resulting dialog box to change the selected path.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

87

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-27. Tool Settings - Code and Language Options

Option Description

• Move up - Click to move the selected path one position higher in the list.

• Move down - Click to move the selected path one position lower in the list.

Use these buttons in the dialog boxes to help you work with paths:

•

Workspace - Click, then use the resulting dialog box to specify the path. The resulting path, relative to the workspace, appears in the list.

• File system - Click, then use the resulting dialog box to specify the path. The resulting absolute path appears in the list.

3.3.5.2 Include Search Paths

Use this panel to specify multiple search paths and the order in which to search those paths. The IDE first looks for the specified file in the current directory, or the directory that you specify in the

INCLUDE

directive. If the IDE does not find the file, it continues searching the paths shown in this panel. The IDE keeps searching paths until it finds the file or finishes searching the last path at the bottom of the Include File Search Paths list.

The IDE appends to each path the string that you specify in the

INCLUDE

directive.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

88 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-28. Tool Settings - Include Search Paths

Table 3-28 lists and describes the toolbar buttons that help work with the file search

paths.

Table 3-28. Tool Settings - Include Search Paths Toolbar Buttons

Button Description

Add - Click to open the Add directory path dialog box

(

Include Search Paths ) and specify the file search path.

Delete - Click to delete the selected file search path. To confirm deletion, click Yes in the Confirm Delete dialog box.

Edit - Click to open the Edit directory path dialog box

(

Include Search Paths ) and update the selected object file

search path.

Move up - Click to move the selected file search path one position higher in the list.

Move down - Click to move the selected file search path one position lower in the list.

Figure 3-29 shows the Add directory path dialog box.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

89

Build Properties for StarCore

Figure 3-29. Add directory path Dialog Box

Figure 3-30 shows the Edit directory path dialog box.

Figure 3-30. Edit directory path Dialog Box

The buttons in the Add directory path and Edit directory path dialog boxes help work with the object file search paths.

• OK- Click to confirm the action and exit the dialog box.

• Cancel- Click to cancel the action and exit the dialog box.

• Workspace- Click to display the Folder Selection dialog box and specify the object file search path. The resulting path, relative to the workspace, appears in the appropriate list.

• File system- Click to display the Browse for Folder dialog box and specify the object file search path. The resulting path appears in the appropriate list.

3.3.5.3 Preprocessor

Use this panel to specify preprocessor behavior. You can specify whether to display banner information or verbose progress messages, and you can control error output. Also, you can specify substitution strings for the preprocessor.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

90 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-31. Tool Settings - Preprocessor

Table 3-29 describes the various options available on the Preprocessor panel.

Table 3-29. Tool Settings - Preprocessor Options

Display Banner

Read Options from File

Redirect Errors to File

Option

Show Verbose Assembly Progress Messages

Description

Checked - The assembler shows banner information.

Cleared - The assembler hides banner information.

Note that this option has no effect on hosts where the default setting is to hide the banner.

Checked - The assembler reports the progress of the assembly process to the standard error output stream. For example, the assembler reports the beginning of each pass and the opening and closing of input files. You can use this information to monitor the assembly process and ensure that it proceeds normally.

Cleared - The assembler does not report assembly progress to the standard error-output stream.

Enter the path to a file that specifies command-line options for assembler use. Alternatively, click the Browse button, then use the resulting dialog box to specify the file.

Enter the path to a file that the assembler uses in place of the default error file (errfil). The Overwrite Existing Error

File checkbox controls how the assembler writes to the file that you specify in this text box.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

91

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-29. Tool Settings - Preprocessor Options (continued)

Overwrite Existing Error File

Option

Defined Symbols

Description

Checked - The assembler overwrites the file that you specify in the Redirect Errors to File text box.

Cleared - The assembler appends information to the file that you specify in the Redirect Errors to File text box.

Specify substitution strings that the assembler applies to all the assembly-language modules in the build target. Enter just the string portion of a substitution string. The IDE prepends the -d token to each string that you enter. For example, entering opt1 x produces this result on the command line: dopt1 x Note that this option is similar to the DEFINE directive, but applies to all assembly-language modules in a build target. Use these toolbar buttons to work with the substitution strings:

•

Add - Click, then use the resulting dialog box to specify the string.

• Delete - Click to remove the selected string.

• Edit - Click, then use the resulting dialog box to change the selected string.

•

Move up - Click to move the selected string one position higher in the list.

•

Move down - Click to move the selected string one position lower in the list.

3.3.5.4 Listing File

Use this panel to specify whether the assembler generates a listing file. When generating a listing file, you can specify whether the assembler also prints a memory-utilization report. Also, you can specify the types of warnings that the assembler includes in the listing file. (

Figure 3-32

)

NOTE

Use the

Additional Arguments

panel of the StarCore Assembler to specify options that you want to apply to all assemblylanguage files in the current build target. Use the

OPT

directive for options that you want to apply to just the assembly-language source file in which the

OPT

directive appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

92 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-32. Tool Settings - Listing File

Table 3-30 describes the various options available on the Listing File panel.

Generate Listing File

Listing File Debug

Table 3-30. Tool Settings - Listing File Options

Option

Print Memory Utilization Report

Description

Checked - The assembler creates a listing file named lstfil.lst.

Cleared - The assembler does not create a list file.

To specify this setting, check the

Generate Listing File

checkbox.

Checked - The assembler uses the source listing, instead of the assembly-language source file, as the debug source file.

This setting corresponds to the LDB option of the OPT directive and to the -oldb command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler uses the assembly language source file, instead of the source listing, as the debug source file.

To specify this setting, check the

Generate Listing File

checkbox.

Checked - The assembler writes a report of load and runtime memory-use information to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the MU option of the OPT directive and to the omu command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write the memoryutilization report to the listing file.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

93

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-30. Tool Settings - Listing File Options (continued)

Option

Print Warning for Unresolved References

Print All Warnings

Description

To specify this setting, check the

Generate Listing File

checkbox.

Checked - The assembler generates a warning at assembly time for each unresolved external reference. This setting, valid just in relocatable mode, corresponds to the UR option of the OPT directive and to the -our command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not generate a warning at assembly time for each unresolved external reference.

To specify this setting, check the

Generate Listing File

checkbox.

Checked - The assembler writes all warning messages to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the W option of the OPT directive and to the -ow command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write all warning messages to the listing file.

3.3.5.5 Listing Contents

Use this panel to specify the information that the assembler generates in a listing file.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

94 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-33. Tool Settings - Listing Contents

Table 3-31 describes the various options available on the Listing Contents panel.

Table 3-31. Tool Settings - Listing Contents Options

Generate Listing Headers

Print DC Expansion

Option

Expand DEFINE Directive Strings

Description

Checked - The assembler writes listing headers, titles, and subtitles to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the HDR option of the OPT directive and to the -ohdr command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write listing headers, titles, and subtitles to the listing file.

Checked - The assembler writes Define Constant (DC) expansions to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the

CEX option of the OPT directive and to the -ocex commandline option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write Define Constant expansions to the listing file.

Checked - The assembler writes expanded DEFINE directives to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the MD option of the OPT directive and to the - omd command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write expanded DEFINE directives to the listing file.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

95

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-31. Tool Settings - Listing Contents Options (continued)

Option

Print Conditional Assembly Directive

Print Conditional Assembly

Print Skipped Conditional Assembly Lines

Print Macro Definitions

Print Macro Calls

Print Macro Expansions

Description

Checked - The assembler writes conditional-assembly directives to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the CL option of the OPT directive and to the -ocl command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write conditionalassembly directives to the listing file.

Checked - The assembler writes conditional-assembly and section nesting-level information to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the NL option of the OPT directive and to the onl command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write conditional-assembly and section nesting-level information to the listing file.

Checked - The assembler writes to the listing file assemblylanguage statements skipped due to conditional assembly.

This setting corresponds to the U option of the OPT directive and to the -ou command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write to the listing file assembly-language statements skipped due to conditional assembly.

Checked - The assembler writes macro definitions to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the MD option of the

OPT directive and to the -omd command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write macro definitions to the listing file.

Checked - The assembler writes macro calls to the listing file.

This setting corresponds to the MC option of the OPT directive and to the -omc command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write macro calls to the listing file.

Checked - The assembler writes macro expansions to the listing file. This setting corresponds to the MEX option of the

OPT directive and to the -omex command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not write macro expansions to the listing file.

3.3.5.6 Listing Format

Use this panel to specify format of the information that the assembler generates in a listing file.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

96 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Figure 3-34. Tool Settings - Listing Format

Table 3-32 describes the various options available on the Listing Format panel.

Fold Trailing Comments

Form Feed for Page Ejects

Format Messages

Table 3-32. Tool Settings - Listing Format Options

Option Description

Checked - For each source-code statement that has a trailing comment, the assembler moves the comment underneath that statement. The assembler aligns the moved comment with the opcode field. This setting corresponds to the FC option of the OPT directive and to the -ofc command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not move trailing comments underneath their corresponding source code statements.

Checked - The assembler inserts form feeds into the listing file. Each form feed causes a printer to eject the currently printing page. This setting corresponds to the FF option of the

OPT directive and to the -off command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not insert form feeds into the listing file.

Checked - The assembler inserts format messages into the listing file such that the message text aligns and breaks at word boundaries. This setting corresponds to the FM option of the OPT directive and to the -ofm command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not insert format messages into the listing file.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

97

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-32. Tool Settings - Listing Format Options (continued)

Pretty Print Listing

Relative Comment Spacing

Option Description

Checked - The assembler aligns listing-file fields at fixed column positions (without regard to the related source file's format). This setting corresponds to the PP option of the OPT directive and to the -opp command-line option.

Cleared - The assembler does not align listing-file fields at fixed column positions.

Checked - The assembler uses relative comment spacing in the listing file. Checking this checkbox causes the position of comments in the listing file to float. This setting corresponds to the RC option of the OPT directive and to the -orc command-line option. Cleared - The assembler uses fixed comment spacing in the listing file.

3.3.5.7 Additional Arguments

Use this panel to specify StarCore assembler additional arguments.

Figure 3-35. Tool Settings - Additional Arguments

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

98 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-33 describes the various options available on the Additional Arguments panel.

Table 3-33. Tool Settings - Additional Arguments Options

StarCore 3900 Assembler

Option Description

Specify additional command-line options to the assembler.

The arguments specified in this panel apply will to all assembly language files in the current build target.

3.3.6 StarCore 3900 Preprocessor

Use this panel to specify the command, options, and expert settings for the StarCore 3900 preprocessor.

Figure 3-36. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 Preprocessor

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

99

Build Properties for StarCore

Table 3-34 describes the various options available on the StarCore 3900 Preprocessor

panel.

Command

All options

Table 3-34. Tool Settings - StarCore 3900 Preprocessor Options

Expert Settings:

Command line pattern

Option Description

Shows the location of the disassembler executable file.

Shows the actual command line the disassembler will be called with.

Shows the expert settings command line parameters; default is "${SCToolsInstallDir}${COMMAND}" ${FLAGS} $

{INPUTS}.

3.3.6.1 Preprocessor Settings

Use this panel to specify the Preprocessor behavior.

Figure 3-37. Tool Settings - Preprocessor Settings

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

100 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 3 Build Properties

Table 3-35 describes the various options available on the Preprocessor Settings panel.

Keep All Comments

Table 3-35. Tool Settings - Preprocessor Settings Options

Option Description

Checked -The preprocessor preserves all the comments.

Cleared -The preprocessor does not preserve comments.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

101

Build Properties for StarCore

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

102 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4

Debug Configurations

A CodeWarrior project can have multiple associated debug configurations.

A debug configuration is a named collection of settings that the CodeWarrior tools use.

The CodeWarrior project wizard generates launch configurations with names that follow the pattern projectname - configtype - targettype, where:

• projectname represents the name of the project

• configtype represents the type of launch configuration

• targettype represents the type of target software or hardware on which the launch configuration acts

If you use the CodeWarrior wizard to create a new project, the IDE creates two debugger related launch configurations:

• a Debug configuration that produces unoptimized code for development purposes

• a Release configuration that produces code intended for production purposes

This chapter explains:

•

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

•

Customizing Debug Configurations

•

Reverting Debug Configuration Settings

4.1 Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

The Debug Configurations dialog box allows you to specify debugger-related settings for your CodeWarrior project.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

103

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

NOTE

As you modify a launch configuration's debugger settings, you create pending, or unsaved, changes to that launch configuration. To save the pending changes, you must click the

Apply button of the Debug Configurations dialog box, or click the Close button and then the Yes button.

Table 4-1. Debug Configurations Dialog Box Tabs

Main

Arguments

Debugger

Debug

Download

Other Executables

Symbolics

OS Awareness

Source

Environment

Common

Trace and Profile

4.1.1 Main

Use this tab to specify the project and the application you want to run or debug.

You can also specify a connection configuration on this tab.

The following figure shows the Main tab.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

104 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Figure 4-1. Debug Configurations - Main Tab

The table below lists the various sections available on the Main tab page.

Table 4-2. Main tab sections

Section

Debug Session Type

C/C++ application

Build (if required) before launching

Target settings

4.1.1.1 Debug Session Type

You can use this section to select one of the pre-defined debug session type or create a custom debug session.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

105

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

The table listed below describes the options in the Debug session type section in the

Main tab page.

Attach

Connect

Download

Custom

Table 4-3. Main Tab - Debug session type options and use cases

Option Typical Use Example

Debug a target system without modifying its state at all initially, but allow use of symbolics during actual debug.

Useful for debugging a system that is already up and running.

For more details, see

Attach .

Raw debug of a board without any software or symbolics.

Useful during hardware bring up, and often combined with scripts for checking various aspects of the hardware. For more details, see

Connect .

Develop code that gets downloaded to the system on debugger launch. Useful for bareboard code development without a working bootloader. For more details, see

Download

.

Debug a target system using additional debugging features.

Useful when a Custom debug configuration may needs to be transformed into an Attach or Connect configuration. For more details, see

Custom

.

NOTE

The default debugger configuration causes the debugger to cache symbolics between sessions. However, the Connect command invalidates this cache. If you must preserve the contents of the symbolics cache, and you plan to use the

Connect command, clear the Cache Symbolics Between

Sessions checkbox in the Symbolics page of the Debug

Configurations dialog box just before you issue the Connect command.

The table listed below shows the debugging phases supported by the launch configurations at the run-time.

NOTE

The CodeWarrior Attach launch configuration does not support restarting a debugging session.

Table 4-4. CodeWarrior Launch Configurations-Run-time behavior

Startup Phase

Load symbolic info for main application

Reset target

Initialization

Yes

Yes

Yes

Download

Yes

Attach Connect

Not applicable

No

Optional

Yes

Yes

Table continues on the next page...

Optional

Custom

Optional

Optional

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

106 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Table 4-4. CodeWarrior Launch Configurations-Run-time behavior (continued)

Startup Phase

Download

OS Awareness

Initialize PC

Stop at startup

Download

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

No

Optional

No

No

Attach Connect

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Optional

Custom

Optional

Optional

Optional

4.1.1.1.1 Attach

The Attach command assumes that code is already running on the board and therefore does not run a target initialization file.

The state of the running program is undisturbed. The debugger loads symbolic debugging information for the current build target's executable. The result is that you have the same source-level debugging facilities you have in a normal debug session (the ability to view source code and variables, and so on). The function does not reset the target, even if the launch configuration specifies this action. Further, the command loads symbolics, does not stop the target, run an initialization script, download an ELF file, or modify the program counter (PC).

NOTE

The debugger assumes that the current build target's generated executable matches the code currently running on the target.

In a debugging session, the CodeWarrior Attach launch configuration skips setting up the target hardware, and downloading the program image to that target hardware. The code image might reside on the target hardware already, or you might want to skip setting up the target hardware. Like the CodeWarrior Connect launch configuration, the settings in the Arguments and Environment panels do not apply.

Although similar to a debugging session, the goal of attaching the debugger to a process is to get insight into the current state of that process, and to do so with minimal disturbance to its state of execution. Having the debugger attach to a process skips most of the state-altering steps involved in starting a debugging session, such as resetting the target, initializing the target, and downloading code. When the debugger finishes attaching to the process, you have many of the debugging capabilities that you would have in a debugging session (such as source-level debugging, line breakpoints, watchpoints, console input/output, and so on).

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

107

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

NOTE

The debugger does not support restarting debugging sessions that you start by attaching the debugger to a process.

A process is an active program and related resources:

• Executing program code

• An address space

• One or more threads of execution. A thread is a unit of activity that has a program counter and a set of processor registers

• A data section

• A set of resources, such as open files and pending signals

On a bareboard (without an operating system), a given core has one process: one thread of execution executing one program in one address space. With an operating system, there can be several processes on a given core (with one active at any given moment).These processes either run different programs in different address spaces or even execute the same program, sharing an address space, open files, and so on.

4.1.1.1.2 Connect

The Connect command runs the target initialization file specified in the Properties for

<Target> dialog box.

This file is responsible for setting up the board before connecting to it. The Connect function does not load any symbolic debugging information for the current build target's executable. You therefore do not have access to source-level debugging and variable display. The Connect command resets the target if the launch configuration specifies this action. Further, the command stops the target, (optionally) runs an initialization script, does not load symbolics, download an ELF file, or modify the program counter (PC).

In a debugging session, the CodeWarrior Connect launch configuration skips downloading the code image to the target hardware, and loading symbolics into the debugger. Skipping these steps is useful for board initialization and bring-up. The code might reside on the target hardware already, or you might want to skip loading symbolics into the debugger.

Like the CodeWarrior Attach launch configuration, the settings in the Arguments and

Environment panels do not apply. The Source tab is available, however, so that you can specify source paths in order to load an image after connecting the debugger to the target.

4.1.1.1.3 Download

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

108 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

The Debug command resets the target if the launch configuration specifies the action.

Further, the command stops the target, (optionally) runs an initialization script, downloads the specified ELF file, and modifies the PC.

In a debugging session, the CodeWarrior Download launch configuration downloads the code image to the target hardware, and loads symbolics into the debugger. The

Source tab can be used to specify source paths in order to load an image after connecting the debugger to the target.

4.1.1.1.4 Custom

Custom debug session type provides maximum flexibility to choose between debugging features.

4.1.1.2 C/C++ application

Use this section to control how C/C++ application is configured for the launch configuration.

The following table lists the options in the C/C++ application section in the Main tab page.

Project

Table 4-5. Main Tab - C/C++ application options

Option

Application

NOTE: This option is disabled when the Connect debug session type is selected.

Description

Specifies the project to associate with the selected debug launch configuration. Click

Browse to select a different project.

Check, if you want to use an target application. And, specify the name and location of the C or C++ application in the corresponding text box.

Clear, if you do not want to use a target application.

Search Project - Click to open the Program Selection dialog box and select from the binary files generated for the selected project.

Browse - Click to open the Open dialog box and select any binary file.

Variables - Click to open the Select build variable dialog box and select the build variables to be associated with the program.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

109

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

Table 4-5. Main Tab - C/C++ application options

Option Description

NOTE: The dialog box displays an aggregation of multiple variable databases and not all these variables are suitable to be used from a build environment. Given below are the variables that should be used:

• ProjDirPath - returns the absolute path of the current project location in the file system

${ProjDirPath}/Source/main.c"

• workspace_loc - returns the absolute path of a workspace resource in the file system, or the location of the workspace if no argument is specified

${workspace_loc:/ProjectName/

Source main.c"

4.1.1.3 Build (if required) before launching

Use this section to control how auto build is configured for the launch configuration.

Changing this setting overrides the global workspace setting and can provide some speed improvements.

The following table lists the options in the Build (if required) before launching section in the Main tab page.

Table 4-6. Main Tab - Build (if required) before launching options

Build Configuration

Select configuration using `C/C++ Application'

Disable auto build

Enable auto build

Option

Use workspace settings (default)

Configure Workspace Settings

Description

Specifies the configuration to build before launching the resulting executable.

Select to build the build configuration that generated the file specified in the Application text box, before launching the application.

When the

Select configuration using `C/C++ Application'

checkbox is selected, the

Build Configuration drop-down list is disabled, and the build configuration that generated the file specified in the

Application text box is selected to be built before launching the application.

Disables auto build for the launch configuration which may improve launch performance.

Enables auto build for the launch configuration which can slow down launch performance.

Uses the global auto build settings.

Opens the Launching preference panel where you can change the workspace settings.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

110 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

4.1.1.4 Target settings

Use this section to control how the target is configured for the launch configuration.

The following table lists the options in the Target settings section in the Main tab page.

Connection

Edit

New

Execute reset sequence

Execute initialization script(s)

Target

Table 4-7. Main Tab - Target settings Options

Option Description

Specifies the applicable connection configuration.

Click to edit the selected connection configuration.

Click to create a new connection configuration for the selected project and application.

Check to apply reset settings, specified in the target configuration. Alternatively, clear the option to ignore reset settings.

NOTE: This option is disabled when the Connect or Attach debug session type is selected.

Check to execute the initialization script(s), specified in the target configuration. Alternatively, clear the option to ignore the initialization script(s).

NOTE: This option is disabled when the Connect debug session type is selected.

Select the core to be debugged. The list of cores is displayed in the Target list, if the selected connection configuration is for a multicore target.

4.1.2 Arguments

Use this tab to specify the program arguments that an application uses and the working directory for a run or debug configuration.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

111

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

Figure 4-2. Debug Configurations-Arguments tab

The table below lists the various options available on the Arguments tab page.

Table 4-8. Arguments Tab options

Option

Program arguments

Variables

Working Directory

Use default

Workspace

File System

Variables

Description

Specifies the arguments passed on the command line.

Click to select variables by name to include in the program arguments list.

Specifies the run/debug configuration working directory.

Check to specify the local directory or clear to specify a different workspace, a file system location, or variable.

Click to specify the path of, or browse to, a workspace relative working directory.

Click to specify the path of, or browse to, a file system directory.

Click to specify variables by name to include in the working directory.

4.1.3 Debugger

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

112 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Use this tab to configure debugger settings.

The Debugger tab presents different pages for specifying different settings.

NOTE

The content in the Debugger Options panel changes, depending on the Debug session type selected on the Main tab page.

Figure 4-3. Debug Configurations-Debugger tab

The table below lists the various options available on the Arguments tab page.

Option

Debugger Options

Table 4-9. Debugger tab options

Description

Displays configuration options specific to the selected debugger type. See the following sections for more details:

•

Debug

•

Download

•

Other Executables

•

Symbolics

•

OS Awareness

NOTE

OCE feature is not supported in current release.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

113

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

4.1.3.1 Debug

Use this page to specify the program execution options, Breakpoint and watchpoint options, and target access behavior.

Resume program

Figure 4-4. Debugger Options-Debug Page

NOTE

The options displayed on the Debug tab varies depending on the selected launch configuration.

The table below lists the various options available on the Debug page.

Option

Initialize program counter at

Table 4-10. Debugger Options - Debug

Description

Controls the initialization of program counter.

• Program entry point - Select to initialize the program counter at a specified program entry pont.

• User specified - Select to initialize the program counter at a userspecified function. The default location is main.

NOTE: Disabling this option will also disable the Resume program and

Stop on startup at options.

Select to resume the execution after the program counter is initialized.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

114 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Stop on startup at

Stop on exit

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Table 4-10. Debugger Options - Debug (continued)

Option

Install regular breakpoints as

Description

NOTE: Disabling this option will also disable the Stop on startup at option.

Stops program at specified location. When cleared, the program runs until you interrupt it manually, or until it hits a breakpoint.

• Program entry point - Select to stop the debugger at a specified program entry point.

• User specified - Select to stop the debugger at a user-specified function. The default location is main.

Check this option to have the debugger set a breakpoint at the code's exit point. For multicore projects, when you set this option for one project on one core, it is set for projects on the other cores. Clear this option to prevent the debugger from setting a breakpoint at the code's exit point.

Check this option to install breakpoints as either:

• Regular

• Hardware

• Software

Restore watchpoints

Disable display of variable values by default

Disable display of register values by default

Refresh while running period (seconds)

Clear this option to install breakpoints as Regular breakpoints.

Check this option to restore previous watchpoints.

Check this option to disable the display of variable values. Clear this option to enable the display of variable values

Check this option to disable the display of register values. Clear this option to enable the display of register values

Specifies the refresh period used when a view is configured to refresh, while the application is running. By default, the refresh period is set to two seconds.

4.1.3.2 Download

Use this page to specify which executable code sections the debugger downloads to the target, and whether the debugger should read back those sections and verify them.

NOTE

Selecting all options in the Program Download Options group significantly increases download time.

Initial Launch options apply to the first debugging session. Successive Runs options apply to subsequent debugging sessions.

The Download options control whether the debugger downloads the specified Program

Section Data type to the target hardware. The Verify options control whether the debugger reads the specified Program Section Data type from the target hardware and compares the read data against the data written to the device.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

115

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

The Section Data type corresponds to the section defined in the linker command file

(.lcf).

Figure 4-5. Debugger Options-Download Page

The table below lists the various options available on the Download page.

Table 4-11. Debugger Options - Download

Section Data Type

Executable

Constant Data

Initialized Data

Uninitialized Data

Explanation

Controls downloading and verification for executable sections. Check appropriate checkboxes to specify downloading and verifications, for initial launch and for successive runs.

Controls downloading and verification for constant-data sections. Check appropriate checkboxes to specify downloading and verifications, for initial launch and for successive runs.

Controls downloading and verification for initialized-data sections. Check appropriate checkboxes to specify downloading and verifications, for initial launch and for successive runs.

Controls downloading and verification for uninitialized-data sections. Check appropriate checkboxes to specify downloading and verifications, for initial launch and for successive runs.

Table 4-12. Section Data Type Corresponding to Linker Command file

Executable

Section Data Type Linker Command File Section Type

Text

Comments

Program-code sections that have xflags in the linker-command file.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

116 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Table 4-12. Section Data Type Corresponding to Linker Command file (continued)

Section Data Type

Constant Data

Initialized Data

Uninitialized Data

Linker Command File Section Type

Data

Data bss

Comments

Program-data sections that have neither xnor wflags in the linker command file.

Program-data sections with initial values.

These sections have wflags, but not xflags, in the linker command file.

Program-data sections without initial values. These sections have wflags, but not xflags, in the linker-command file.

4.1.3.3 Other Executables

Use this page to specify additional ELF files to download or debug in addition to the main executable file associated with the launch configuration.

Figure 4-6. Debugger Options-Other Executables Page

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

117

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

The table below lists the various options available on the Other Executables page.

File list

Add

Change

Remove

Option

Table 4-13. Debugger Options - Other Executables

Description

Shows files and projects that the debugger uses during each debug session.

Debug column:

•

Checked-The debugger loads symbolics for the file.

•

Cleared-The debugger does not load symbolics for the file.

Download column:

• Checked-The debugger downloads the file to the Target

Device.

•

Cleared-The debugger does not download the file to the Target

Device.

Click to open the

Debug Other Executable dialog box, and add other executable file to debug while debugging this target.

Use this dialog box to specify the following settings:

• Specify the location of the additional executable - Enter the path to the executable file that the debugger controls in addition to the current project's executable file. Alternatively, click the Browse button to open a dialog box that you can use to specify the path.

• Load symbols - Check to have the debugger load symbols for the specified file. Clear to prevent the debugger from loading the symbols. The Debug column of the File list corresponds this setting.

• Download to device - Check to have the debugger download the specified file to the target device. If you are debugging a Linux application, you can enter in the Specify the remote download path text box the path on the device to which you want to download the file.

NOTE:

The Specify the remote download path option applies just to Linux application debugging; you should leave the text box blank for all other types of debugging sessions.

Clear the Download to device checkbox to prevent the debugger from downloading the file to the device. The

Download column of the File list corresponds to the Download to device setting.

• OK - Click to add the information that you specify in the

Debug Other

Executable dialog box to the File list.

Click to change the settings for the entry currently selected in the

File list column.

Change this information as needed, then click the OK button to update the entry in the File list.

Click to remove the entry currently selected in the File list.

4.1.3.4 Symbolics

Use this page to specify whether the IDE keeps symbolics in memory.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

118 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Symbolics represent an application's debugging and symbolic information. Keeping symbolics in memory, known as caching symbolics, is beneficial when you debug a large-size application.

Consider a situation in which the debugger loads symbolics for a large application, but does not download content to a hardware device and the project uses custom makefiles with several build steps to generate this application. In such a situation, caching symbolics helps speed up the debugging process. The debugger uses the readily available cached symbolics during subsequent debugging sessions. Otherwise, the debugger spends significant time creating an in-memory representation of symbolics during subsequent debugging sessions.

NOTE

Caching symbolics provides the most benefit for large applications, where doing so speeds up application-launch time.

If you debug a small application, caching symbolics does not significantly improve the launch times.

Figure 4-7. Debugger Options-Symbolics Page

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

119

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

The table below lists the various options available on the Symbolics page.

Table 4-14. Debugger Options - Symbolics

Option

Cache Symbolics Between Sessions

Create and Use Copy of Executable

Description

Check this option to have the debugger cache symbolics between debugging sessions. If you check this checkbox and clear the

Create and

Use Copy of Executable checkbox, the executable file remains locked after the debugging session ends. In the

Debug view, right-click the locked file and select Un-target Executables to have the debugger delete its symbolics cache and release the file lock. The IDE enables this menu command when there are currently unused cached symbolics that it can purge.

Clear this option so that the debugger does not cache symbolics between debugging sessions.

Check this option to have the debugger create and use a copy of the executable file. Using the copy helps avoid file-locking issues with the build system. If you check this checkbox, the IDE can build the executable file in the background during a debugging session.

Clear this option so that the debugger does not create and use a copy of the executable file.

4.1.3.5 OS Awareness

Use this page to specify the operating system (OS) that resides on the target device.

Use the Target OS list box to specify the OS that runs on the target device, or specify

None to have the debugger use the bareboard.

For more information, see the SmartDSP OS Concepts Guide.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

120 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Figure 4-8. Debugger Options-OS Awareness Page

The table below lists the options available on the OS Awareness page.

Option

Log Task Awareness

Log Display

Start log

End log

IP Address

Port Number

Log Tasks

Log Software Interrupts

Log Hardware Interrupts

Log Spin Locks

Log Performance

Factory Settings

Table 4-15. Debugger Options - OS Awareness

Description

Enables the logging of Task Awareness in the Kernel Awareness Log Viewer

Enables graphic Display of the log

Specify the Kernel Awareness log start address

Specify the Kernel Awareness log end address

Specify the CommExpert IP Address

Specify the CommExpert IP Address

Enables the logging of Tasks in the Kernel Awareness Log Viewer

Enables the logging of Software Interrupts in the Kernel Awareness Log Viewer

Enables the logging of Hardware Interrupts in the Kernel Awareness Log Viewer

Enables the logging of Spin Locks in the Kernel Awareness Log Viewer

Enables the logging of Performance in the Kernel Awareness Log Viewer

Set the log addresses and events to default values

4.1.4 Source

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

121

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

Use this tab to specify the location of source files used when debugging a C or C++ application.

By default, this information is taken from the build path of your project.

Figure 4-9. Debug Configurations-Source Tab

The table below lists the various options available on the Source tab page.

Source Lookup Path

Add

Edit

Remove

Up

Down

Restore Default

Option

Table 4-16. Source Tab Options

Description

Lists the source paths used to load an image after connecting the debugger to the target.

Click to add new source containers to the Source Lookup

Path search list.

Click to modify the content of the selected source container.

Click to remove selected items from the

Source Lookup

Path list.

Click to move selected items up the

Source Lookup Path

list.

Click to move selected items down the

Source Lookup Path

list.

Click to restore the default source search list.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

122 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Table 4-16. Source Tab Options (continued)

Option

Search for duplicate source files on the path

Description

Select to search for files with the same name on a selected path.

4.1.5 Environment

Use this tab to specify the environment variables and values to use when an application runs.

Figure 4-10. Debug Configurations-Environment Tab

The table below lists the various options available on the Environment tab page.

Option

Environment Variables to set

New

Table 4-17. Environment Tab Options

Description

Lists the environment variable name and its value.

Click to create a new environment variable.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

123

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

Table 4-17. Environment Tab Options (continued)

Select

Edit

Option

Remove

Append environment to native environment

Replace native environment with specified environment

Description

Click to select an existing environment variable.

Click to modify the name and value of a selected environment variable.

Click to remove selected environment variables from the list.

Select to append the listed environment variables to the current native environment.

Select to replace the current native environment with the specified environment set.

4.1.6 Common

Use this tab to specify the location to store your run configuration, standard input and output, and background launch options.

Figure 4-11. Debug Configurations-Common Tab

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

124 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

The table below lists the various options available on the Common tab page.

Local file

Shared file

Option

Table 4-18. Common Tab Options

Description

Select to save the launch configuration locally.

Select to specify the path of, or browse to, a workspace to store the launch configuration file, and be able to commit it to a repository.

Select to add the configuration name to Run or Debug menus for easy selection.

Select an encoding scheme to use for console output.

Select to assign a console view to receive the output.

Display in favorites menu

Console Encoding

Allocate Console (necessary for input)

File

Browse Workspace

Browse File System

Variables

Append

Port

Act as Server

Hostname/IP Address

Launch in background

Specify the file name to save output. .

Specifies the path of, or browse to, a workspace to store the output file.

Specifies the path of, or browse to, a file system directory to store the output file.

Select variables by name to include in the output file.

Select to append output. Clear to recreate file each time.

Select to redirect standard output ( stdout, stderr) of a process being debugged to a user specified socket.

NOTE: You can also use the redirect command in debugger shell to redirect standard output streams to a socket.

Select to redirect the output from the current process to a local server socket bound to the specified port.

Select to redirect the output from the current process to a server socket located on the specified host and bound to the specified port. The debugger will connect and write to this server socket via a client socket created on an ephemeral port

Select to launch configuration in background mode.

4.1.7 Trace and Profile

Use this page to configure the selected launch configuration for simulator and hardware profiling.

NOTE

Trace and Profile is available only for PACC and QDS targets.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

125

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

Figure 4-12. Debug Configurations-Trace and Profile Tab (PACC Simulator Target)

The table listed below explains the Trace and Profile tab options for PACC simulator targets.

Table 4-19. Trace and Profile Tab Options (PACC Simulator Target)

Enable logging

Output Folder

Communication port number

Option

Automatically (when debug session starts)

Manually (using debug toolbar trace buttons)

Description

Basic Tab

Check Enable Logging checkbox if you want that a log file is created. The log file has details of the actions that takes place while collecting the trace data. For example, when the debug session is terminated or when the target execution resumed or stopped.

Specify the location of folder that will store the trace and profile results.

Used in TCP/IP communication between software analysis and CCSSIM2. You should choose the free port no. from interval 0-65535.

Intermediate Tab

The trace collection process is started automatically when the debug session is launched.

This is the default behavior. This option is used when you want to manually control the trace collection. The trace collection process will not be started automatically on debug session launch, but the trace configuration options are applied, when you click on Start Trace Collection button.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

126 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Figure 4-13. Debug Configurations - Trace and Profile Tab (QDS Hardware Target)

The table listed below explains the Trace and Profile tab options for the QDS hardware targets.

Trace Scenario

Table 4-20. Trace and Profile Tab Options (QDS Hardware Target)

Option Description

Basic Tab

Trace module configured by User Code

CodeWarrior

Profiling - L2 cache events

Profiling - data loads

Profiling - clock cycles

Allows to do the trace settings in the code without using the Trace and Profile page of Debug launch.

Allows to do the trace settings using

Trace and Profile page of Debug launch

Trace values of counters of both triad A and B on subroutine/interrupt call/return instructions

Trace values of counters of both triad A and B on subroutine/interrupt call/return instructions

Trace values of counters of triad A on subroutine/interrupt call/return instructions

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

127

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

Table 4-20. Trace and Profile Tab Options (QDS Hardware Target) (continued)

Extend Trace Scenario with:

Bandwidth

Option

Profiling - advanced

Program trace

Coverage

None

Ownership Trace

User defined events

Description

Traces each change of flow instructions

Trace values of counters of both triad A and B on subroutine/interrupt call/return instructions

For C source lines, displays the percentage of number of assembly instructions executed from the total number of assembly instructions corresponding to the source line. For assembly source lines, it shows if the instructions were executed or not

Traces only subroutine/interrupt call/ return instructions

Traces information on current task ID.

Ownership trace facilitates tracking the active operating system task by providing visibility to the special purpose registers designated for use by the OS for process ID

Traces any write to TMDAT and TMTAG core registers

Each default trace scenario has a specific bandwidth. The bandwidth indicates how many messages are routed in trace stream, on hardware, depending on used trace scenario to collect trace

Trace collection One Buffer

Intermediate Tab

Location

Overwrite

Continuos

NPC Buffer

Gigabit TAP + Trace

Probe buffer size (bytes)

DDR buffer

Buffer start address

Buffer size

Use settings from LCF file

When the buffer is full, tracing stops, but not the target.

Continue to write trace to buffer by overwriting old records in buffer - circular buffer.

Collects trace continuously till you suspend the target application.

Saves trace data in NPC internal buffer.

Saves trace data in probe buffer.

Specifies the size of the probe buffer.

Saves trace data in DDR. Magenta is the bus that transfers trace data from NPC internal buffer to DDR.

Specifies the start address of the DDR where trace data is saved.

Specifies the DDR memory size of the region used as trace buffer.

Uses trace buffer start address and size from linker files. File common.l3k

contains _TRACE_BUFFER_size and

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

128 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

Table 4-20. Trace and Profile Tab Options (QDS Hardware Target) (continued)

Triad Settings

Option

Trace Control Settings

Automatically (when debug session starts)

Manually (using debug toolbar trace buttons)

Description

_TRACE_BUFFER_start variables that allow you to change the start address and size. File mmu_attr.l3k contains

_ENABLE_TB variable that allows to enable and disable settings for trace buffer from linker's files.

Allows you to specify trace configuration settings.

The trace collection process is started automatically when the debug session is launched.

This is the default behavior. This option is used when you want to manually control the trace collection. The trace collection process will not be started automatically on debug session launch, but the trace configuration options are applied, when you click on the Start

Trace Collection button.

Advanced Tab

Triad A

Triad B

In the Advanced tab, you need to configure triad settings if you have selected Profile trace checkbox in

Customize Trace Scenario. After selecting Profile trace checkbox, the default profiling events are mapped on

Triad A - L1 Icache Access Sorting and

Triad B - Program L1 L2 Cacheable

Access Sorting.

NOTE

For more details about the Trace and Profile tab options, see the CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore SC3900FP

DSP Architectures Tracing and Analysis Tools User Guide

.

4.2 Customizing Debug Configurations

When you use the CodeWarrior wizard to create a new project, the wizard sets the project's launch configurations to default values.

You can change the default values of your project's launch configurations, according to your program's requirements.

To modify the launch configurations:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

129

Customizing Debug Configurations

1. Start the CodeWarrior IDE.

2. From the main menu bar of the IDE, select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears. The left side of this dialog box has a list of debug configurations that apply to the current application.

3. Expand the CodeWarrior configuration.

4. From the expanded list, select the debug configuration that you want to modify.

The follwoing figure shows the Debug Configurations dialog box with the settings for the debug configuration you selected.

Figure 4-14. Debug Configurations Dialog Box

5. In the group of tabs in the upper-right side of the dialog box, click a tab.

6. Change the settings on the debug configuration page as per your requirements. See

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

for details on the various settings of this page.

7. Click Apply to save the new settings.

When you finish, you can click Debug to start a new debugging session, or click Close to save your changes and close the Debug Configurations dialog box.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

130 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 4 Debug Configurations

4.3 Reverting Debug Configuration Settings

After making some modifications in a debug configuration's settings, you can either save the pending (unsaved) changes or revert to last saved settings.

To save the pending changes, click the Apply button of the Debug Configurations dialog box, or click the Close button and then the Yes button.

To undo pending changes and restore the last saved settings, click the Revert button at the bottom of the Debug Configurations dialog box.

The IDE restores the last set of saved settings to all pages of the Debug Configurations dialog box. Also, the IDE disables the Revert button until you make new pending changes.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

131

Reverting Debug Configuration Settings

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

132 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5

Working with Debugger

This chapter explains various aspects of CodeWarrior debugging, such as debugging a project, configuring connections, setting breakpoints and watchpoints, working with registers, viewing memory, viewing cache, and debugging externally built executable files.

NOTE

This chapter documents debugger features that are specific to

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP

Architectures. For more information on debugger features that are common in all CodeWarrior products, see CodeWarrior

Development Studio Common Features Guide

.

This chapter explains:

•

Debugging a CodeWarrior project

•

Configuring Connections

•

Editing remote system configuration

•

Working with Breakpoints

•

Working with Watchpoints

•

Working with Registers

•

Viewing memory

•

Viewing Cache

•

Changing Program Counter Value

•

Hard resetting

•

Per Core Reset

•

Setting Stack Depth

•

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Wizard

•

Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

133

Debugging a CodeWarrior project

5.1 Debugging a CodeWarrior project

This section explains how to debug a CodeWarrior project.

This section describes the following two ways of debugging a CodeWarrior project:

•

Debugging Project Using Simulator

•

Debugging Project using Target Hardware

5.1.1 Debugging Project Using Simulator

This section describes how to debug a project using simulator.

To debug a CodeWarrior project using a simulator, follow these steps:

1. Select the project you want to debug in the CodeWarrior Projects view.

2. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears, as shown in the figure below.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

134 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-1. Debug Configurations Dialog Box

3. Select the required launch configuration, for example

B4860-

Sim_Debug_B4860_Download_core00

.

You can also debug the B4860 simulator projects using the B4860 instruction set simulator (ISS) supported on Linux 64-bit operating system.

a. In the Connection area, click Edit.

The Properties for <project> dialog box appears (shown in the figure below).

b. Select CCSSIM2 ISS from the Connection type drop-down list.

c. In the Connection tab, select the Manual Launch option.

d. Specify the IP address of the Linux 64-bit machine, CCSSIM2 is started on, in the Server hostname/IP text box.

NOTE

For information about launching simulator on a Linux

PC, see "Creating, Building, and Debugging a Project" section in CodeWarrior for StarCore 3900FP DSPs -

Windows Edition Quick Start

.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

135

Debugging a CodeWarrior project

e. Specify the port number used while launching the CCSSIM2 in the Server port

number text box.

Figure 5-2. Properties for <Project> Dialog Box

f. Click OK.

4. Configure the launch configuration settings, using the various tabs available in the

Debug Configurations dialog box.

5. Click Debug.

The debugger downloads your program to the selected core, switches to the Debug perspective, and halts execution at first statement of main()

.

6. Similarly, download your program to all the other cores.

The Debug view displays all the threads associated with the cores.

7. Click Multicore Resume in the Debug view (see the figure below) to resume all cores.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

136 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-3. Multi-core Debugging - Resume All Cores

8. Select Run > Multicore Terminate.

NOTE

For details on multi-core debugging, see the

Multi-Core

Debugging

chapter.

The debugger terminates the active debug session. The threads associated with each core in the Debug view disappear.

You just finished debugging a simulator project.

5.1.2 Debugging Project using Target Hardware

This section describes how to debug a project using target hardware.

To debug a CodeWarrior project using target hardware, follow these steps:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

137

Debugging a CodeWarrior project

1. Select the hardware project you want to debug in the CodeWarrior Projects view.

2. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-4. Debug Configurations Dialog Box

3. Select the required launch configuration, for example board_project_Debug_B4860_Download_core00

.

4. Click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection> dialog box appears (shown in the figure below).

5. Select required TAP connection from the Connection type drop-down list. For example, Ethernet TAP.

6. Enter the JTAG clock speed in the JTAG clock speed text box.

7. Specify the hostname/IP of the target board in the Server hostname/IP text box.

8. Specify the port number in the Server port number text box.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

138 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-5. Properties for <connection> Dialog Box - Connection Settings

9. Click OK.

10. Configure the launch configuration settings, using the various tabs available in the

Debug Configurations dialog box.

11. Click Apply.

12. Click Debug.

The debugger downloads your program to the selected core, switches to the

Debug perspective, and halts execution at first statement of

main()

.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

139

Configuring Connections

Figure 5-6. Debugging - Target Board Project

13. Select Run > Terminate.

The debugger terminates the active debug session.

NOTE

For details on multi-core debugging, see the

Multi-Core

Debugging

chapter.

You just finished debugging a project using the target board.

5.2 Configuring Connections

This section describes how to configure the debugger connections.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

140 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

The CodeWarrior debugger can communicate with StarCore devices in several ways. The table below lists each StarCore device along with the protocols the debugger can use to communicate with that device.

Table 5-1. Debugger Communication Protocols for StarCore Devices

Device family

Qonverge

StarCore device

B4060 QDS

CCS Simulator TAP

SC3900

B4420 QDS

B4420 ISS

B4460 QDS

B4860 QDS

B4860 ISS

G4860 QDS

SC3900fp Platform ISS

SC3900fp Platform

PACC

In this section:

•

CodeWarrior Connection Server

•

Connection types

5.2.1 CodeWarrior Connection Server

The CodeWarrior Connection Server (CCS) provides a TCP/IP connection point for debugger communications.

If you run a CCS instance on your computer, remote instances of the CodeWarrior debugger can access each target board connected to your system. Similarly, each instance of the CodeWarrior debugger can access the target boards connected to each remote computer that runs a CCS instance.

In this section:

•

Running CCS

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

141

Configuring Connections

•

Displaying CCS Console

•

Configuring CCS

5.2.1.1 Running CCS

Each time you debug a project that uses a local CCS connection, the CodeWarrior IDE automatically starts CCS if it is not running already. Also, you can run CCS yourself from this location, where <CWInstallDir> is the path to your CodeWarrior installation:

<CWInstallDir>\ccs\bin\ccs.exe

If CCS is running, the icon appears in the Windows® taskbar. Right-click this icon to display the CCS context menu. The menu has these commands:

• Show Console: Displays the CCS console

• Hide Console: Hides the CCS console

• About CCS: Displays version information

• Quit CCS: Terminates CCS

5.2.1.2 Displaying CCS Console

The CodeWarrior Connection Server (CCS) console allows you to view and change server-connection options. You can issue commands by typing them into the commandline window or by selecting options from the console's menus.

To display CCS console, follow these steps:

1. Run

<CWInstallDir>\ccs\bin\ccs.exe

, where

<CWInstallDir>

is the path to your

CodeWarrior installation.

CCS starts and the icon appears in the Windows® taskbar.

2. Right-click the CCS icon and select Show console from the context menu.

The CodeWarrior Connection Server console appears, as shown in the figure below.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

142 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-7. CodeWarrior Connection Server Console

5.2.1.3 Configuring CCS

CodeWarrior Connection Server uses parallel port 1 to communicate with a target device and listens for commands on port 41475. The CCS connection configuration can be set up using the ccs.cfg file. CCS reads ccs.cfg for start up commands to configure the connection. ccs.cfg

is located in

<CWInstallDir>\ccs\bin\

. To change these default settings, follow these steps:

1. Run

<CWInstallDir>\ccs\bin\ccs.exe

, where

<CWInstallDir>

is the path to your

CodeWarrior installation.

CCS starts and the icon appears in the Windows® taskbar.

2. Right-click the CCS icon and select Show console from the context menu.

The CodeWarrior Connection Server console appears.

3. At the console command prompt, issue these commands: a.

delete all

This command deletes the current CCS configuration.

b.

config

cc

where cc can be:

• parallel:

<#>

• lpt

(same as parallel

)

• epp:

<#>

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

143

Configuring Connections

• usb

• powertap:

<ipaddr>

• wiretap:

<#>

• lspusb

This command defines the command converter that CCS uses.

c.

config port

port_num

where port_num is the port on which CCS listens for commands. The default

CCS port number is 41475.

4. Right click the CCS icon.

The CCS context menu appears.

5. Select Quit CCS from this menu.

CodeWarrior Connection Server console exits.

NOTE

Any changes you make to the CCS configuration are permanent. They persist from one CCS session to the next.

You have modified the default CCS settings.

5.2.2 Connection types

This section describes the different connection types provided by CodeWarrior debugger for connecting the target board to a computer.

The connection types supported by CodeWarrior debugger are:

•

CCSSIM2 ISS

•

CCSSIM2 PACC

•

Ethernet TAP

•

Gigabit TAP + Trace

•

Gigabit TAP

•

USB TAP

•

CodeWarrior TAP

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

144 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

5.2.2.1 CCSSIM2 ISS

Select this connection type to connect to simulators based on the CCSSIM2 ISS interface.

To configure the settings of the CCSSIM2 ISS connection type, perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection group, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> window appears.

3. Select CCSSIM2 ISS from the Connection type drop-down list.

The Connection and Advanced tabs display options with respect to the settings of the selected connection type.

The table below describes various options available on the Connection tab page.

CCS server

Table 5-2. CCSSIM2 ISS - Connection Tab Options

Option

Automatic launch

Server port number

CCS executable

Manual launch

Server hostname/IP

Server port number

Description

Select to automatically launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Select to specify the path of, or browse to, the executable file of the CCS server.

Select to manually launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the CCS server.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

The table below describes the various options available on the Advanced tab page.

Table 5-3. CCSSIM2 ISS - Advanced Tab Options

Target connection lost settings

Option

Try to reconnect

Description

If this option is selected, the lost CCS connection between the target and host is reset. Select the

Timeout checkbox to specify the time interval (in seconds) after which the connection will be lost.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

145

Configuring Connections

Table 5-3. CCSSIM2 ISS - Advanced Tab Options (continued)

Advanced CCS settings

Option

Terminate the debug session

Ask me

CCS timeout

Enable logging

Description

If this option is selected, the debug session is terminated and the lost connection between

JTAG and CCS server is not reset.

This is the default setting. If the CCS connection is lost between the target and host, the user is asked if the connection needs to be reset or terminated.

Specifies the CCS timeout period. If the target does not respond in the provided time-interval, you receive a CCS timeout error.

Select to display protocol logging in console.

5.2.2.2 CCSSIM2 PACC

Select this connection type to connect to simulators based on the CCSSIM2 PACC interface.

NOTE

CCSSIM2 PACC connection is available only for the SC3900fp target.

To configure the settings of the CCSSIM2 PACC connection type, perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations window appears.

2. In the Connection group, click the Edit button next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> window appears.

3. Select CCSSIM2 PACC from the Connection type drop-down list.

The Connection and Advanced tabs display options with respect to the settings of the selected connection type.

The table below describes various options available on the Connection tab page.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

146 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

CCS Server

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Table 5-4. CCSSIM2 PACC - Connection Tab Options

Option

Automatic launch

Server port number

CCS executable

Manual launch

Server hostname/IP

Server port number

Description

Select to automatically launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Select to specify the path of, or browse to, the executable file of the CCS server.

Select to manually launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the CCS server.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

The table below describes the various options available on the Advanced tab page.

Table 5-5. CCSSIM2 PACC - Advanced Tab Options

Target connection lost settings

Advanced CCS settings

Option

Try to reconnect

Terminate the debug session

Ask me

CCS timeout

Enable logging

Description

If this option is selected, the lost CCS connection between the target and host is reset. Select the

Timeout checkbox to specify the time interval (in seconds) after which the connection will be lost.

If this option is selected, the debug session is terminated and the lost connection between

JTAG and CCS server is not reset.

This is the default setting. If the CCS connection is lost between the target and host, the user is asked if the connection needs to be reset or terminated.

Specifies the CCS timeout period. If the target does not respond in the provided time-interval, you receive a CCS timeout error.

Select to display protocol logging in console.

5.2.2.3 Ethernet TAP

The CodeWarrior and Ethernet TAP and USB TAP hardware use emulation technology to control and provide visibility into your target system. They let you control and debug software running in-target, with minimal intrusion into target operation. You use the

OnCE connector on your target hardware to interface with the TAP hardware.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

147

Configuring Connections

Select this connection type when Ethernet network is used as interface to communicate with the hardware device.

To configure the settings of an Ethernet TAP connection type, perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection group, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> window appears.

3. Select the Ethernet TAP from the Connection type drop-down list.

The Connection and Advanced tabs display options with respect to the settings of the selected connection type.

The table below describes various options available on the Connection tab page.

Table 5-6. Ethernet TAP - Connection Tab Options

Ethernet TAP

JTAG settings

CCS server

Option

Hostname/IP

JTAG clock speed (kHz)

Automatic launch

Server port number

CCS executable

Manual launch

Server hostname/IP

Server port number

Connect server to TAP

Description

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the TAP.

Specifies the JTAG clock speed.

Select to automatically launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Click to specify the path of, or browse to, the executable file of the CCS server.

Select to manually launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the CCS server.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Select to enable the CCS server to connect to the TAP.

The table below describes the various options available on the Advanced tab page.

Table 5-7. Ethernet TAP - Advanced Tab Options

Target connection lost settings

Option Description

Try to reconnect If this option is selected, the lost CCS connection between the target and host is reset. Select the

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

148 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Table 5-7. Ethernet TAP - Advanced Tab Options (continued)

Advanced CCS settings

JTAG config file

Advanced TAP settings

Option

Terminate the debug session

Ask me

CCS timeout

Enable logging

Force shell download

Description

Timeout checkbox to specify the time interval (in seconds) after which the connection will be lost.

If this option is selected, the debug session is terminated and the lost connection between

JTAG and CCS server is not reset.

This is the default setting. If the CCS connection is lost between the target and host, the user is asked if the connection needs to be reset or terminated.

Specifies the CCS timeout period. If the target does not respond in the provided time-interval, you receive a CCS timeout error.

Select to display protocol logging in console.

This panel displays the JTAG configuration file being used. This panel is populated only if you have selected a JTAG configuration file for your project. If a JTAG configuration file is not selected, this panel displays a None value. For more details on JTAG configuration files, see

Creating a JTAG Initialization File

and Setting

Launch Configurations

.

Select to force a reload of the TAP shell software.

5.2.2.4 Gigabit TAP + Trace

Select this connection type when Gigabit TAP and Trace is used as interface to communicate with the hardware device.

To configure the settings of a Gigabit TAP + Trace connection type, perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection group, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> window appears.

3. Select the Gigabit TAP + Trace from the Connection type drop-down list.

The Connection and Advanced tabs display the options with respect to the settings of the selected connection type.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

149

Configuring Connections

The table below describes various options available on the Connection tab page.

Gigabit TAP + Trace

JTAG settings

Aurora settings

CCS server

Table 5-8. Gigabit TAP + Trace - Connection Tab Options

Option

Hostname/IP

Debug connection

JTAG clock speed (kHz)

Aurora data rate

Receive lanes

Transmit lanes

Automatic launch

Server port number

CCS executable

Manual launch

Server hostname/IP

Server port number

Connect server to TAP

Description

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the TAP.

Specifies the type of debug connection to use.

The options available are JTAG over JTAG cable connection, JTAG over Aurora cable connection, and Aurora connection.

Specifies the JTAG clock speed.

Specifies the Aurora data rate, which refers to the frequency with which the raw data bits are transferred on the wire. The Aurora connection is used only for trace analysis.

Select to specify the Aurora receive lane settings.

Select to specify the Aurora transmit lane settings.

Select to automatically launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Select to specify the path of, or browse to, the executable file of the CCS server.

Select to manually launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the CCS server.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Select to enable the CCS server to connect to the TAP.

The table below describes the various options available on the Advanced tab page.

Table 5-9. Gigabit TAP + Trace - Advanced Tab Options

Target connection lost settings

Option

Try to reconnect

Terminate the debug session

Ask me

Description

If this option is selected, the lost CCS connection between the target and host is reset. Select the

Timeout checkbox to specify the time interval (in seconds) after which the connection will be lost.

If this option is selected, the debug session is terminated and the lost connection between

JTAG and CCS server is not reset.

This is the default setting. If the CCS connection is lost between the target and host, the user is asked if the connection needs to be reset or terminated.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

150 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Table 5-9. Gigabit TAP + Trace - Advanced Tab Options (continued)

Advanced CCS settings

JTAG config file

Advanced TAP settings

Option

CCS timeout

Enable logging

Force shell download

Description

Specifies the CCS timeout period. If the target does not respond in the provided time-interval, you receive a CCS timeout error.

Select to display protocol logging in console.

This panel displays the JTAG configuration file being used. This panel is populated only if you have selected a JTAG configuration file for your project. If a JTAG configuration file is not selected, this panel displays a None value. For more details on JTAG configuration files, see

Creating a JTAG Initialization File

and Setting

Launch Configurations

.

Select to force a reload of the TAP shell software.

5.2.2.5 Gigabit TAP

Select this connection type when Gigabit TAP is used as interface to communicate with the hardware device.

To configure the settings of a Gigabit TAP connection type, perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection group, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> window appears.

3. Select the Gigabit TAP from the Connection type drop-down list.

The Connection and Advanced tabs display options with respect to the settings of the selected connection type.

The table below describes various options available on the Connection tab page.

Gigabit TAP

JTAG settings

Table 5-10. Gigabit TAP - Connection Tab Options

Option

Hostname/IP

JTAG clock speed (kHz)

Table continues on the next page...

Description

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the TAP.

Specifies the JTAG clock speed.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

151

Configuring Connections

Table 5-10. Gigabit TAP - Connection Tab Options (continued)

CCS server

Option

Automatic launch

Server port number

CCS executable

Manual launch

Server hostname/IP

Server port number

Connect server to TAP

Description

Select to automatically launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Click to specify the path of, or browse to, the executable file of the CCS server.

Select to manually launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the CCS server.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Select to enable the CCS server to connect to the TAP.

The table below describes the various options available on the Advanced tab page.

Target connection lost settings

Advanced CCS settings

JTAG config file

Advanced TAP settings

Table 5-11. Gigabit TAP - Advanced Tab Options

Option

Try to reconnect

Terminate the debug session

Ask me

CCS timeout

Enable logging

Force shell download

Description

If this option is selected, the lost CCS connection between the target and host is reset. Select the

Timeout checkbox to specify the time interval (in seconds) after which the connection will be lost.

If this option is selected, the debug session is terminated and the lost connection between

JTAG and CCS server is not reset.

This is the default setting. If the CCS connection is lost between the target and host, the user is asked if the connection needs to be reset or terminated.

Specifies the CCS timeout period. If the target does not respond in the provided time-interval, you receive a CCS timeout error.

Select to display protocol logging in console.

This panel displays the JTAG configuration file being used. This panel is populated only if you have selected a JTAG configuration file for your project. If a JTAG configuration file is not selected, this panel displays a None value. For more details on JTAG configuration files, see

Creating a JTAG Initialization File

and Setting

Launch Configurations

.

Select to force a reload of the TAP shell software.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

152 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

5.2.2.6 USB TAP

Select this connection type when USB TAP is used as interface to communicate with the hardware device.

To configure the settings of a USB TAP connection type, perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection group, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> window appears.

3. Select USB TAP from the Connection type drop-down list.

The Connection and Advanced tabs display the options with respect to the settings of the selected connection type.

4. n

The table below describes various options available on the Connection tab page.

USB TAP

JTAG settings

CCS server

Table 5-12. USB TAP - Connection Tab Options

Option

USB serial number

JTAG clock speed (kHz)

Automatic launch

Server port number

CCS executable

Manual launch

Server hostname/IP

Server port number

Connect server to TAP

Description

Select and specify the USB serial number of the

USB TAP, required only if using multiple USB

TAPs.

Specifies the JTAG clock speed.

Select to automatically launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Click to specify the path of, or browse to, the executable file of the CCS server.

Select to manually launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the CCS server.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Select to enable the CCS server to connect to the TAP.

The table below describes the various options available on the Advanced tab page.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

153

Configuring Connections

Target connection lost settings

Advanced CCS settings

JTAG config file

Advanced TAP settings

Table 5-13. USB TAP - Advanced Tab Options

Option

Try to reconnect

Terminate the debug session

Ask me

CCS timeout

Enable logging

Force shell download

Description

If this option is selected, the lost CCS connection between the target and host is reset. Select the

Timeout checkbox to specify the time interval (in seconds) after which the connection will be lost.

If this option is selected, the debug session is terminated and the lost connection between

JTAG and CCS server is not reset.

This is the default setting. If the CCS connection is lost between the target and host, the user is asked if the connection needs to be reset or terminated.

Specifies the CCS timeout period. If the target does not respond in the provided time-interval, you receive a CCS timeout error.

Select to display protocol logging in console.

This panel displays the JTAG configuration file being used. This panel is populated only if you have select a JTAG configuration file for your project. If a JTAG configuration file is not selected, this panel displays a None value. For more details on JTAG configuration files, see

Creating a JTAG Initialization File

and Setting

Launch Configurations

.

Select to force a reload of the TAP shell software.

5.2.2.7 CodeWarrior TAP

Select this connection type when either the CodeWarrior TAP is used as interface to communicate with the hardware device.

To configure the settings of a CodeWarrior TAP connection type, perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection group, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> window appears.

3. Select CodeWarrior TAP from the Connection type drop-down list.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

154 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

The Connection and Advanced tabs display the options with respect to the settings of the selected connection type.

The table below describes various options available on the Connection tab page.

Table 5-14. CodeWarrior TAP - Connection Tab Options

CodeWarrior TAP

JTAG settings

CCS server

Option

Hardware Connection

Hostname/IP

Serial Number

JTAG clock speed (kHz)

Automatic launch

Server port number

CCS executable

Manual launch

Server hostname/IP

Server port number

Connect server to TAP

Description

Specifies CodeWarrior TAP interface to communicate with the hardware device.

CodeWarrior TAP supports both USB and

Ethernet network interfaces.

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the TAP.

NOTE: Enabled only if Hardware Connection is set to Ethernet.

Select and specify the USB serial number of the

USB TAP; required only if using multiple

CodeWarror TAPs (over USB).

NOTE: Enabled only if Hardware Connection is set to

USB.

Specifies the JTAG clock speed.

Select to automatically launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Click to specify the path of, or browse to, the executable file of the CCS server.

Select to manually launch the specified CCS server on the specified port.

Specifies hostname or the IP address of the CCS server.

Specifies the port number to launch the CCS server on.

Select to enable the CCS server to connect to the CodeWarrior TAP.

The table below describes the various options available on the Advanced tab page.

Table 5-15. CodeWarrior TAP - Advanced Tab Options

Target connection lost settings

Option

Try to reconnect

Terminate the debug session

Description

If this option is selected, the lost CCS connection between the target and host is reset. Select the

Timeout checkbox to specify the time interval (in seconds) after which the connection will be lost.

If this option is selected, the debug session is terminated and the lost connection between

JTAG and CCS server is not reset.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

155

Configuring Connections

Table 5-15. CodeWarrior TAP - Advanced Tab Options (continued)

Advanced CCS settings

JTAG config file

Advanced TAP settings

Option

Ask me

CCS timeout

Enable logging

Force shell download

Description

This is the default setting. If the CCS connection is lost between the target and host, the user is asked if the connection needs to be reset or terminated.

Specifies the CCS timeout period. If the target does not respond in the provided time-interval, you receive a CCS timeout error.

Select to display protocol logging in console.

This panel displays the JTAG configuration file being used. This panel is populated only if you have select a JTAG configuration file for your project. If a JTAG configuration file is not selected, this panel displays a None value. For more details on JTAG configuration files, see

Creating a JTAG Initialization File

and Setting

Launch Configurations

.

Select to force a reload of the TAP shell software.

You can connect to the CodeWarrior TAP connection using two options:

•

CodeWarrior TAP - JTAG Connection through USB

•

CodeWarrior TAP - JTAG Connection through Ethernet

5.2.2.7.1 CodeWarrior TAP - JTAG Connection through USB

This section describes how to connect to a board using the CodeWarrior TAP – JTAG physical connection through USB.

To connect perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection group, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> dialog box appears.

3. Select CodeWarrior TAP from the Connection type drop-down list.

4. Select USB from the Hardware connection drop-down list.

5. If you have more than one target connected to your machine through USB, then you have specify the serial number of the device for the connection, for this check the

corresponding checkbox and specify the correct serial number in the text box ( Figure

5-8 ).

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

156 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

NOTE

The CodeWarrior TAP USB serial number is its MAC address.

Figure 5-8. CodeWarrior TAP - USB Connection

6. Configures the JTAG speed and the advanced CCS settings as per the requirement.

7. Validate the settings.

8. Selects the new connection in the launch configuration and starts the debug session.

NOTE

The connection through JTAG interface through USB has the same settings as the CodeWarrior USB TAP connection.

5.2.2.7.2 CodeWarrior TAP - JTAG Connection through Ethernet

This section describes how to connect to a board using the CodeWarrior TAP – JTAG physical connection through Ethernet.

To connect the board, perform the following steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection group, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> dialog box appears.

3. Select CodeWarrior TAP from the Connection type drop-down list.

4. Select Ethernet from the Hardware connection drop-down list.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

157

Editing remote system configuration

5. Specify the correct IP address of the device in the Hostname/IP text box (

Figure

5-9 ).

Figure 5-9. CodeWarrior TAP - Ethernet Connection

6. Configures the JTAG speed and the advanced CCS settings as per the requirement.

7. Validate the settings.

8. Selects the new connection in the launch configuration and starts the debug session.

NOTE

The connection through JTAG interface through Ethernet has the same settings as the CodeWarrior Ethernet TAP connection.

5.3 Editing remote system configuration

The remote system configuration model defines the connection and system configurations where you can define a single system configuration that can be referred to by multiple connection configurations.

To edit the system configuration, perform these steps:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. In the Connection panel, click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection launch configuration> window appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

158 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

3. Click Edit next to the Target drop-down list.

The Properties for <system launch configuration> window appears.

4. Select the appropriate system type from the Target type drop-down list.

5. Make the respective settings in Initialization tab ,

Memory tab

,

I/O Model Tab and

Advanced tab

.

6. Click OK to save the settings.

7. Click OK to close the Properties window.

In this section:

•

Initialization tab

•

Memory tab

•

I/O Model Tab

•

Advanced tab

5.3.1 Initialization tab

Use the Initialization tab to specify target initialization file for various cores.

Figure 5-10. Initialization tab

The table below lists the various options available on the Initialization tab page.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

159

Editing remote system configuration

Table 5-16. Initialization tab options

Option

Target

Processor reset

Core reset

Run out of reset

Initialize target

Initialize target script

Select to execute target system reset.

Description

NOTE: If the current core is the first core debugged from the JTAG chain, then debugger will reset all cores from the chain (from all processors of the current

JATG chain, including the non-StarCore cores). If you have other debug sessions started for the cores from the current chain, then ‘target reset’ will be ignored.

Select to execute processor reset.

NOTE: If the current core is the first debugged core from the current processor, then the debugger will reset all StarCore cores of that processor, but the non-

StarCore cores of the processor will not be affected. If you have other debug session started for the cores of the current processor, then ‘processor reset’ will be ignored, also, if for the current debug session a ‘target reset’ was executed, then also ‘processor reset’ will be ignored.

Select to include the respective core for core reset operation.

NOTE: Core reset option resets only the current core. If for the current debug session a ‘target reset’ or a ‘processor reset’ was executed, then ‘core reset’ will be ignored.

Select to include the respective core for run out of reset operation. Debugger runs this command right after reset (independent of the reset type) and will trigger a core resume.

Click to specify a target initialization file for the respective core. Debugger executes this command at launch/debug, if the current core has the corresponding control checked.

Lists the path to a Debugger Shell Tcl script that runs when launching a debug session for the respective core. To edit, select a cell, then click the ellipsis (...) button to open the Target InitializationFile dialog box. The settings for a group of cores can be changed all at once by editing the cell of a common ancestor node in the Target hierarchy.

5.3.2 Memory tab

Use the Memory tab to specify memory configuration file for various cores.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

160 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-11. Memory tab

The table below lists the various options available on the Memory tab page.

Option

Target

Memory configuration

Memory configuration file

Table 5-17. Memory tab options

Description

Lists the targets and the supported cores.

Select to specify a memory configuration file for the respective core.

Lists the path to the memory configuration file for the respective core. To edit, select a cell, then click the ellipsis button to open the Memory Configuration File dialog box.

The settings for a group of cores can be changed all at once by editing the cell of a common ancestor node in the Target hierarchy.

5.3.3 I/O Model Tab

Use the I/O Model tab to specify the I/O support option for the selected target (shown in the figure below).

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

161

Working with Breakpoints

Figure 5-12. I/O Model Tab

5.3.4 Advanced tab

Use the Advanced tab to specify that Palladium is used to emulate the target.

Figure 5-13. Advanced tab

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

162 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

5.4 Working with Breakpoints

A breakpoint is set on an executable line of a program; if the breakpoint is enabled when you debug, the execution suspends before that line of code executes.

The different breakpoint types that you can set are listed below:

• Software breakpoints: The debugger sets a software breakpoint into target memory.

When program execution reaches the breakpoint, the processor stops and activates the debugger. The breakpoint remains in the target memory until the user removes it.

The breakpoint can only be set in writable memory, such as SRAM or DDR. You cannot use this type of breakpoints in ROM.

• Hardware breakpoints: Selecting the Hardware menu option causes the debugger to use the internal processor breakpoints. These breakpoints are usually very few and can be used with all types of memories (ROM/RAM) because they are implemented by using processor registers.

Tip

You can also set breakpoint types by issuing the bp command in the Debugger Shell view.

In this section:

•

Setting Breakpoints

•

Setting Hardware Breakpoints

•

Removing Breakpoints

•

Removing Hardware Breakpoints

5.4.1 Setting Breakpoints

This section explains how to set breakpoints within a program in CodeWarrior IDE.

To set a breakpoint, perform the following steps:

1. Switch to the Debug perspective in CodeWarrior IDE.

2. Open the Debug view if it is not already open by selecting Window > Show View >

Debug.

The Debug view appears, shown in the figure below.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

163

Working with Breakpoints

Figure 5-14. Debug View

3. Expand the Thread group.

4. Under the Thread group, select the thread that has the main()

function.

The source code appears in the Editor view (shown in the figure below). The small blue arrow to the left of the source code indicates which code statement the processor's program counter is set to execute next.

Figure 5-15. Editor View

5. In the Editor view, place the cursor on the line that has this statement: printf("Output

%d\n",DataOut[i]);

6. Select Run > Toggle Line Breakpoint.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

164 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

A blue dot appears in the marker bar to the left of the line (shown in the figure below). This dot indicates an enabled breakpoint. After the debugger installs the breakpoint, a blue checkmark appears beside the dot. The debugger installs a breakpoint by loading into the Java™ virtual machine the code in which you set that breakpoint.

Tip

An alternate way to set a breakpoint is to double-click the marker bar to the left of any source-code line. If you set the breakpoint on a line that does not have an executable statement, the debugger moves the breakpoint to the closest subsequent line that has an executable statement. The marker bar shows the installed breakpoint location. If you want to set a hardware breakpoint instead of a software breakpoint, use the bp

command in the Debugger Shell view. You can also right-click on the marker bar to the left of any source-code line, and select Set Special Breakpoint from the context menu that appears.

Figure 5-16. Editor View - After Setting Breakpoints

7. From the menu bar, select Run > Resume.

The debugger executes all lines up to, but not including, the line at which you set the breakpoint. The editor view highlights the line at which the debugger suspended execution.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

165

Working with Breakpoints

5.4.2 Setting Hardware Breakpoints

This section explains how to set hardware breakpoints within a program in CodeWarrior

IDE.

There are two ways to set hardware breakpoints:

•

Using IDE to Set Hardware Breakpoints

•

Using Debugger Shell to Set Hardware Breakpoints

5.4.2.1 Using IDE to Set Hardware Breakpoints

To set a hardware breakpoint using the IDE, follow these steps:

1. In the CodeWarrior IDE, select Run > Breakpoint Types > C/C++ Hardware

Breakpoints.

2. In the Editor view, click in the source line where you want to place the breakpoint.

3. Select Run > Toggle Breakpoint.

A hardware breakpoint appears in the marker bar on the left side of the source line.

5.4.2.2 Using Debugger Shell to Set Hardware Breakpoints

You can use the Debugger Shell view to set hardware breakpoints. Follow these steps to set a hardware breakpoint using the Debugger Shell view:

1. Open the Debugger Shell view.

2. Begin the command line with the text: bp -hw

3. Complete the command line by specifying the function, address, or file at which you want to set the hardware breakpoint.

For example, to set a breakpoint for line 6 in your program, type: bp -hw 6

4. Press the Enter key.

The debugger shell executes the command and sets the hardware breakpoint.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

166 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Tip

Enter help bp

at the command-line prompt to see examples of the bp

command syntax and usage.

5.4.3 Removing Breakpoints

This section explains how to remove breakpoints from a program in CodeWarrior IDE.

To remove a breakpoint from your program, you have two options:

•

Remove Breakpoints using Marker Bar

•

Remove Breakpoints using Breakpoints View

5.4.3.1 Remove Breakpoints using Marker Bar

To remove an existing breakpoint using the marker bar, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the breakpoint in the marker bar.

2. Select Toggle Breakpoint from the menu that appears.

5.4.3.2 Remove Breakpoints using Breakpoints View

To remove an existing breakpoint using the Breakpoints view, follow these steps:

1. Open the Breakpoints view if it is not already open by selecting Window > Show

View > Breakpoints.

The Breakpoints view appears, displaying a list of breakpoints.

2. Right-click on the breakpoint you wish to remove and select Remove from the menu that appears (shown in the figure below).

The selected breakpoint is removed, and it disappears from the both the marker bar and the list in the view.

NOTE

To remove all of the breakpoints from the program at once, select Remove All from the menu.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

167

Working with Breakpoints

Figure 5-17. Removing Breakpoint

5.4.4 Removing Hardware Breakpoints

This section explains how to remove hardware breakpoints from a program in

CodeWarrior IDE.

There are two ways to remove existing hardware breakpoints:

•

Remove Hardware Breakpoints using the IDE

•

Remove Hardware Breakpoints using Debugger Shell

5.4.4.1 Remove Hardware Breakpoints using the IDE

To remove a hardware breakpoint, follow these steps:

1. Right-click on the existing breakpoint in the marker bar.

2. Select Toggle Breakpoint from the menu that appears.

Alternatively, you can remove the breakpoint from the Breakpoints view, using the following steps:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

168 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

1. Open the Breakpoints view if it is not already open by choosing Window > Show

View > Breakpoints.

The Breakpoints view appears, displaying a list of breakpoints.

2. Right-click on the hardware breakpoint you wish to remove and select Remove from the menu that appears.

The selected breakpoint is removed, and it disappears from the both the marker bar and the list in the view.

5.4.4.2 Remove Hardware Breakpoints using Debugger Shell

To remove a hardware breakpoint using the Debugger Shell view, follow these steps:

1. Open the debugger shell.

2. Begin the command line with the text: bp -hw

3. Complete the command line by specifying the function, address, or file at which you want to remove the hardware breakpoint.

For example, to remove a breakpoint at line 6 in your program, type: bp -hw 6 off

4. Press the Enter key.

The debugger shell executes the command and removes the hardware breakpoint.

5.5 Working with Watchpoints

A watchpoint is another name for a data breakpoint that you can set on an address or a range of addresses in the memory.

The debugger halts execution each time the watchpoint location is read, written, or accessed (read or written). You can set a watchpoint using the Add Watchpoint dialog box. To open the Add Watchpoint dialog box, use one of the following views:

• Breakpoints view

• Memory view

• Variables view

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

169

Working with Watchpoints

The debugger handles both watchpoints and breakpoints in similar manners. You can use the Breakpoints view to manage both watchpoints and breakpoints. It means, you can use the Breakpoints view to add, remove, enable, and disable both watchpoints and breakpoints. The debugger attempts to set the watchpoint if a session is in progress based on the active debugging context (the active context is the selected project in the Debug view).

If the debugger sets the watchpoint when no debugging session is in progress, or when restarting a debugging session, the debugger attempts to set the watchpoint at startup as it does for breakpoints. The Problems view displays error messages when the debugger fails to set a watchpoint. For example, if you set watchpoints on overlapping memory ranges, or if a watchpoint falls out of execution scope, an error message appears in the

Problems view. You can use this view to see additional information about the error.

The following sections explain how to set or remove watchpoints:

•

Setting Watchpoints

•

Removing Watchpoints

5.5.1 Setting Watchpoints

Use the Add Watchpoint dialog box to create a watchpoint for a memory range. You can specify these parameters for a watchpoint:

• An address (including memory space)

• An expression that evaluates to an address

• A memory range

• An access type on which to trigger

To open the Add Watchpoint dialog box, follow these steps:

1. Open the Debug perspective.

2. Click one of these tabs:

• Breakpoints

• Memory

• Variables

The corresponding view appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

170 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

3. Right-click the appropriate content inside the view as mentioned in the table below.

In the View...

Breakpoints

Memory

Variables

Table 5-18. Opening the Add Watchpoint dialog box

Right-Click...

An empty area inside the view.

The cell or range of cells on which you want to set the watchpoint.

A global variable.

NOTE

The debugger does not support setting a watchpoint on a stack variable or a register variable. Setting a watchpoint on a local variable may result in halt of execution at unexpected locations.

4. Select Add Watchpoint (C/C++) from the context menu that appears.

The Add Watchpoint dialog box appears (shown in the figure below). The debugger sets the watchpoint according to the settings that you specify in the Add Watchpoint dialog box. The Breakpoints view shows information about the newly set watchpoint. The Problems view shows error messages when the debugger fails to set the watchpoint.

Figure 5-18. Add Watchpoint Dialog Box

The table below describes the options available in the Add Watchpoint dialog box.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

171

Working with Registers

Option

Expression to watch

Memory space

Units

Write

Read

Table 5-19. Add Watchpoint dialog box options

Description

Enter an expression that evaluates to an address on the target device. When the specified expression evaluates to an invalid address, the debugger halts execution and displays an error message. You can enter these types of expressions:

• An r-value, such as &variable

• A register-based expression. Use the $ character to denote register names. For example, enter $SP-12 to have the debugger set a watchpoint on the stack pointer address minus 12 bytes.

The

Add Watchpoint dialog box does not support entering expressions that evaluate to registers.

Select this option to specify an address, including memory space, at which to set the watchpoint. Use the text box to specify the address or address range on which to set the watchpoint. If a debugging session is not active, the text/list box is empty, but you can still type an address or address range.

Enter the number of addressable units that the watchpoint monitors.

Select this option to enable the watchpoint to monitor write activity on the specified memory space and address range. Clear this option if you do not want the watchpoint to monitor write activity.

Select this option to enable the watchpoint to monitor read activity on the specified memory space and address range. Clear this option if you do not want the watchpoint to monitor read activity.

5.5.2 Removing Watchpoints

To remove a watchpoint, perform these steps:

1. Open the Breakpoints view if it is not already open by selecting Window > Show

View > Breakpoints.

The Breakpoints view appears, displaying a list of watchpoints.

2. Right-click on the watchpoint you wish to remove and select Remove from the menu that appears.

The selected watchpoint is removed, and it disappears from the list in the

Breakpoints view.

5.6 Working with Registers

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

172 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Use the Registers view to display and modify the contents of the registers of the processor on your target board.

To display the Registers view, select Window > Show View > Other > Debug >

Registers. The Registers view appears (shown in the figure below). The default state of the Registers view provides details on the processor's registers.

The Registers view displays categories of registers in a tree format. To display the contents of a particular category of registers, expand the tree element of the register category of interest.

Tip

You can also view and update registers by issuing the reg

, change

, and display

commands in the Debugger Shell view.

Figure 5-19. Registers View

In this section:

•

Viewing Register Details

•

Registers View Context Menu

•

Working with Register Groups

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

173

Working with Registers

5.6.1 Viewing Register Details

This section explains how to use the Registers view to show the details of a register.

To open the Registers view, you must first start a debugging session.

To see the registers and their descriptions, follow these steps:

1. In the Debug perspective, click the Registers view tab.

The Registers view appears, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-20. Registers View - Register Details

2. Click the View Menu button (the inverted triangle) on the Registers view toolbar.

3. Select Layout > Vertical or Layout > Horizontal to show register details.

NOTE

Selecting Layout > Registers View Only hides the register details.

4. Expand a register group to see individual registers.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

174 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

5. Select a specific register by clicking it.

The details of the selected register get displayed.

NOTE

Use the Format list box to change the format of data displayed for the selected register.

6. Examine register details. For example,

• Use the Bit Fields group to see a graphical representation of the selected register's bit fields. You can use this graphical representation to select specific bits or bit fields.

• Use the Actions group to perform operations, such as update bit field values and format the displayed register data.

• Use the Description group to see an explanation of the selected register, bit field, or bit value.

Tip

To enlarge the Registers view, click Maximize on the view's toolbar. After you finish looking at the register details, click Restore on the view's toolbar to return the view to its previous size. Alternatively, right-click the

Registers tab and select Detached. The Registers view becomes a floating window that you can resize. After you finish looking at the register details, right-click the

Registers tab of the floating window and select Detached again. You can rearrange the re-attached view by dragging its tab to a different collection of view tabs.

In this section:

•

Bit Fields

•

Changing Bit Fields

•

Actions

•

Description

5.6.1.1 Bit Fields

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

175

Working with Registers

The Bit Fields group of the Registers view (see the figure below) shows a graphical representation of the selected register's bit values. This graphical representation shows how the register organizes bits. You can use this representation to select and change the register's bit values. Hover the cursor over each part of the graphical representation to see additional information.

Figure 5-21. Register Details - Bit Fields Group

Tip

You can also view register details by issuing the reg

command in the Debugger Shell view.

A bit field is either a single bit or a collection of bits within a register. Each bit field has a mnemonic name that identifies it. You can use the Field list box to view and select a particular bit field of the selected register. The list box shows the mnemonic name and bit-value range of each bit field. In the Bit Fields graphical representation, a box surrounds each bit field. A red box surrounds the bit field shown in the Field list box.

After you use the Field list box to select a particular bit field, you see its current value in the = text box. If you change the value shown in the text box, the Registers view shows the new bit field value.

The minimum resolution of bit field descriptions is 2 bits. Consequently, register details are not available for single-bit overflow registers.

The maximum resolution of bit field descriptions is 32 bits.

5.6.1.2 Changing Bit Fields

To change a bit field in a register, you must first start a debugging session, and then open the Registers view.

To change a bit field, perform these steps:

1. In the Registers view, view register details.

2. Expand the register group that contains the bit field you want to change.

Register details appear in the Registers view.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

176 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

3. From the expanded register group above the register details, select the name of the register that contains the bit field that you want to change.

The Bit Fields group displays a graphical representation of the selected bit field. The

Description group displays explanatory information about the selected bit field and parent register.

4. In the Bit Fields group, click the bit field that you want to change. Alternatively, use the Field list box to specify the bit field that you want to change.

5. In the = text box, type the new value that you want to assign to the bit field.

6. In the Action group, click Write.

The debugger updates the bit field value. The bit values in the Value column and the

Bit Fields group change to reflect your modification.

NOTE

Click Revert to discard your changes and restore the original bit field value.

5.6.1.3 Actions

Use the Actions group of the Registers view (see the figure below) to perform various operations on the selected register's bit field values.

Figure 5-22. Register View - Actions Group

The table below lists each item in the Actions group and explains the purpose of each.

Table 5-20. Actions Group Items

Revert

Write

Reset

Item Description

Discard your changes to the current bit field value and restore the original value. The debugger disables this button if you have not made any changes to the bit field value.

Save your changes to the current bit field value and write those changes into the register's bit field. The debugger disables this button after writing the new bit field value, or if you have not made any changes to that value.

Change each bit of the bit field value to its register-reset value. The register takes on this value after a target-device reset occurs. To confirm the bit field change, click Write.

To cancel the change, click Revert.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

177

Working with Registers

Item

Summary

Format

Table 5-20. Actions Group Items (continued)

Description

Display Description group content in a pop-up window. Press the Esc key to close the pop-up window.

Specify the data format of the displayed bit field values.

5.6.1.4 Description

The Description group of the Registers view (see the figure below) shows explanatory information for the selected register.

Figure 5-23. Register View - Description Group

The register information covers:

• Current value

• Description

• Bit field explanations and values

Some registers have multiple modes (meaning that the register's bits can have multiple meanings, depending on the current mode). If the register you examine has multiple modes, you must select the appropriate mode.

5.6.2 Registers View Context Menu

The Registers view context menu provides you various options for working with registers.

To display the Registers view context menu, right-click a register in the Registers view.

The table below lists the options of the Registers view context menu.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

178 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Select All

Copy Registers

Enable

Disable

View Memory

Format

Option

Cast to Type

Restore Original Type

Find

Change Value

Show Details As

Add Register Group

Add Watchpoint (C/C++)

Watch

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Table 5-21. Registers View Context Menu Options

Restore Default Register Groups

Description

Selects the entire contents of the current register.

Copies to the system clipboard the contents of the selected register.

Allows the debugger to access the selected register.

Prevents the debugger from accessing the selected register.

Displays the corresponding memory for the selected register.

Use to specify the displayed data format for the selected register:

• Natural: Default data format

• Decimal: Decimal data format

• Hexadecimal: Hexadecimal data format

• Binary: Binary data format

• Fractional: Fractional data formats, Q0-Q39

Opens a dialog box that you can use to cast the selected register value to a different data type.

Reverts the selected register value to its default data type.

Opens a dialog box that you can use to select a particular register.

Opens a dialog box that you can use to change the current register value.

Allows you to specify how the debugger displays the register's contents. The options are:

•

Default Viewer: The register's contents are displayed as a hexadecimal value.

• Register Details Panel: The register's values are display in a bit format, along with a description of their purpose.

Opens a dialog box that you can use to create a new collection of registers to display in the

Registers view.

Resets the custom groups of registers created using the Add Register Group option, and restores the default groups provided by the debugger as they were when

CodeWarrior was installed. Note that if you select this option, all custom groupings of registers done by you are lost.

Opens the

Add Watchpoint dialog box, proposing to set a watchpoint on an expression representing the register. The debugger sets the watchpoint according to the settings that you specify in the

Add Watchpoint dialog box. The Breakpoints view shows information about the newly set watchpoint. The Problems view shows error messages when the debugger fails to set the watchpoint.

Adds a new watch-expression entry to the Expressions view.

5.6.3 Working with Register Groups

This section describes different operations that can be performed on register groups.

You can perform the following operations on the register groups:

•

Adding a Register Group

•

Editing a Register Group

•

Removing a Register Group

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

179

Working with Registers

5.6.3.1 Adding a Register Group

The default display of the Registers view groups related registers into a tree structure.

You can add a custom group of registers to the default register tree structure.

To add a new register group, perform these steps:

1. Right-click in the Registers view.

A context menu appears.

2. Select Add Register Group from the context menu.

The Register Group dialog box appears, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-24. Register Group Dialog Box

3. Enter in the Group Name text box a descriptive name for the new group.

4. Select the checkbox next to each register you want to appear in the new group.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

180 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Tip

Click Select All to check all of the checkboxes. Click

Deselect All to clear all of the checkboxes.

5. Click OK.

The Register Group dialog box closes. The new group name appears in the

Registers view.

5.6.3.2 Editing a Register Group

In the Registers view, you can edit both the default register groups and the groups that you add.

To do so, use the following steps:

1. In the Registers view, right-click the name of the register group you want to edit.

A context menu appears.

2. Select Edit Register Group from the context menu.

The Register Group dialog box appears.

3. If you wish, enter in the Group Name text box a new name for the group.

4. Check the checkbox next to each register you want to appear in the group.

Tip

Click Select All to check all of the checkboxes. Click

Deselect All to clear all of the checkboxes.

5. Click OK.

The Register Group dialog box closes. The new group name appears in the

Registers view.

5.6.3.3 Removing a Register Group

In the Registers view, you can remove register groups.

To remove a register group, follow these steps:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

181

Viewing memory

1. In the Registers view, right-click the name of register group that you wish to remove.

A context menu appears.

2. Select Remove Register Group from the context menu.

The selected register group disappears from the Registers view.

5.7 Viewing memory

This section explains how to view memory of a target processor.

Use the Memory view to examine the active memory rendering of a specified expression or address. To display the Memory view, select Window > Show View > Other >

Debug > Memory (shown in the figure below).

The Memory view supports the display of multiple memory spaces. The figure below shows the Memory view with the Expression:baseaddr <name> tree active memory rendering tab.

Figure 5-25. Memory View

In this section:

•

Adding Memory Monitor

•

Adding Memory Rendering

•

Removing Memory Rendering

•

Resetting to Base Address

•

Go to Address

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

182 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

5.7.1 Adding Memory Monitor

This section describes how to add memory monitor in the Memory view.

To display the supported memory spaces for a target in the Memory view, perform the following steps:

You can add multiple memory monitors to the Memory view. To add a new memory monitor, follow these steps:

1. Start a debugging session.

2. Open the Memory view.

3. Click the plus sign (+) icon on the Monitors pane toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the Monitors pane and select Add Memory Monitor from the context menu.

The Monitor Memory dialog box appears, as shown in the figure below.

NOTE

The Memory space option appears only when the debugger associated with the active debugging context supports memory spaces, and the currently debugged process has multiple memory spaces.

Figure 5-26. Monitor Memory Dialog Box

4. Specify information about the memory monitor:

• To enter a memory space and literal address, simply enter an address.

• To enter an expression, type in the expression. If you enter a literal address as the expression, use the prefix 0x to indicate hexadecimal notation, or use no prefix to indicate decimal notation. You can use the drop-down list to select a previously specified expression.

NOTE

If you do not select a memory space and the expression does not contain a memory space then the memory

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

183

Viewing memory

space is set to default data memory space that is specific for each architecture

5. Select the Memory space checkbox to translate the memory address or the expression to another memory space.

The Memory space drop-down list is enabled.

6. Select one of the following values from the Memory space drop-down list:

Figure 5-27. Monitor Memory Dialog Box - Memory space Options

• Physical: Indicates that the specified address or expression refers to physical memory space.

• Data: Indicates that the specified address or expression refers to data memory space.

• Program: Indicates that the specified address or expression refers to program memory space.

• Physical cache - inhibited: Similar with the Physical memory space, but no cached information will be used when the data is displayed.

• SAP: The memory is accessible while the system is running. The target must not be running for the above listed memory spaces. While using this memory space, other memory spaces will not be available.

NOTE

This memory space is available only for hardware targets.

7. Click OK.

After evaluating the expression, an address and a memory space are generated. The debugger is responsible for converting the address and the memory space into a new address and other memory space that user selected.

The debugger uses the following rules to perform the address and memory space conversion:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

184 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

• If memory space is

NA

or it is not compatible with selected memory space, then the new expression address has the same value as evaluated address. For example,

Data:0x100

should be converted to

Program:0x100

, because the

Data and

Program

memory spaces are not compatible.

• If memory space is compatible with selected memory space, than the new expression address is computed based on the MMU information. For example,

Data:0x100

should be converted to

Physical:0x2100

based on MMU configuration

( data:0x0 --> physical:0x2000

).

NOTE

In both scenarios, the new address and new memory space for expression will be displayed in memory rendering label and title along with the original expression.

The memory monitor is added to the Monitors panel and the default rendering is displayed in the Renderings panel.

5.7.2 Adding Memory Rendering

You can use the Renderings tab page of the Memory view to examine the memory content, starting at any valid address. The information displayed in this page is read-only and cannot be used to modify the memory content.

To add a new memory rendering, follow these steps:

1. Start a debugging session.

2. Open the Memory view.

3. In the Monitors pane, select the memory monitor for which you want to add a memory rendering.

NOTE

To create a memory monitor, right-click a blank area in the

Monitors pane and select Add Memory Monitor.

Alternatively, click the plus sign (+) icon in the Monitors pane toolbar.

4. Click the New Renderings tab in the Memory view.

The New Renderings tab page appears, as shown in the figure below.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

185

Viewing memory

Figure 5-28. New Renderings Tab Page

5. Select a rendering type from the Select rendering(s) to create list.

6. Click Add Rendering(s).

The selected memory rendering type appears in the Memory view.

5.7.3 Removing Memory Rendering

To remove a memory rendering from the Memory view, follow these steps:

1. Open the Memory view.

2. In the Renderings tab page, select the tab that corresponds to the memory rendering that you want to remove.

3. Select Remove Rendering from the context menu.

The memory rendering is removed from the Memory view.

5.7.4 Resetting to Base Address

To reset the memory rendering and display the base address of the rendering, follow these steps:

1. Open the Memory view.

2. In the Renderings tab page, select the tab that corresponds to the disassembly rendering that you want to reset to the base address.

3. Select Reset to Base from the context menu.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

186 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

The disassembly rendering scrolls to the line that contains the base address of the displayed rendering.

5.7.5 Go to Address

The memory view provides graphical controls to display memory at a specific address.

To go to a specific address, follow these steps:

1. Open the Memory view.

2. In the Renderings tab page, select the tab that corresponds to the disassembly rendering for which you want to display a specific address.

3. Select Go to Address from the context menu.

A group of controls appears on the Renderings tab page, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-29. Disassembly Rendering - Go to Address

4. In the blank text box, enter the address that you want to display.

NOTE

Select the Input as Hex checkbox only if you enter the address in hexadecimal notation.

5. Click OK to have the Disassembly rendering scroll to the specified address.

Alternatively, click Cancel to abort the operation and hide the group of controls.

5.8 Viewing Cache

This section provides detailed information on working with caches.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

187

Viewing Cache

The CodeWarrior debugger allows you to view and modify the instruction cache and data cache of the target system during a debug session. The CodeWarrior for StarCore current release supports the cache viewer for L1 instruction, L1 data, L2 and L3 both instruction and data cache.

NOTE

Projects created for ISS targets do not support cache.

In this section:

•

Cache View

•

Cache View Toolbar Menu

5.8.1 Cache View

This section describes how to use Cache view.

Use the Cache view to examine L1 cache (such as instruction cache or data cache). Also, you can use the viewer to display L2 and L3 cache for targets that support it.

Use the Cache view to examine L1 cache (such as instruction cache or data cache). You can also use the viewer to display L2 and L3 cache for the supported targets. To open the

Cache view, use the following steps:

1. Start a debugging session.

2. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select Window > Show View > Other.

The Show View dialog box appears.

3. Expand the Debug group.

4. Select Cache.

5. Click OK.

The Cache view appears, as shown in the figure below.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

188 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-30. Cache View

6. Use the Choose a Cache drop-down list to specify the cache that you want to examine.

NOTE

For each target, you can view the content of all caches if they are enabled. If the Choose a Cache list box is grayed out, the current target does not support viewing the cache.

The table below explains the column headers displayed in the Cache view.

L1 Cache

L2 Cache

L3 Cache

L2 Cache

L3 Cache

L2 Cache

Cache

Table 5-22. Cache View Column Headers

Set

Way

Address

Valid

Task ID

Word

Dirty

Lock

LRU

CoreID

Column Header Description

Specifies the line in current way.

Specifies the way in current cache.

Displays the storage address of the current cache line.

Specifies if the current line is valid. For targets supporting L1 cache viewer, the information is at the line level.

Displays the task ID of the task holding the current cache line. Currently supported only for L1 cache.

Specifies groups of bytes that are read at once and are aligned in cache memory at a given range offset.

Specifies if the cache line is dirty or not.

Locks the cache and prevent the debugger from fetching new lines or discarding current valid lines.

Displays the Least Recently Used (LRU) attribute for each cache line.

Lists the core that caused the reload of the address into the L2 cache.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

189

Viewing Cache

Cache

Table 5-22. Cache View Column Headers (continued)

CoreValid

Column Header Description

core_id[0:3] indicates which of the dL1s have a copy of the line (core_valid[0]=1 core0 dL1 has a copy, core_valid[1]=1 core1 dL1 has a copy). The bits are not mutually exclusive, because a SC cluster has only 2 cores core_valid[2] & core_valid[3] are not used.

5.8.2 Cache View Toolbar Menu

Use the Cache view toolbar menu is to configure the cache information.

To display this menu, click the Menu button (inverted triangle) in the Cache view toolbar.

Tip

The Cache view toolbar buttons are alternative ways to implement the control actions defined in the toolbar menu.

NOTE

Depending upon the selected target, the options available in the

Cache view toolbar may vary.

The table below describes the Cache view toolbar menu options.

Write

Refresh

Invalidate

Flush

Lock

Enable/Disable

Disable LRU

Table 5-23. Cache View Toolbar Menu Options

Option Description

Commits content changes from the Cache view to the cache registers on the target hardware (if the target hardware supports doing so).

Reads data from the target hardware and updates the

Cache

view display.

Discards the cache.

Flushes the entire contents of the cache. This option commits uncommitted data to the next level of the memory hierarchy, then invalidates the data within the cache.

Locks the cache and prevent the debugger from fetching new lines or discarding current valid lines.

Turns on/off the cache.

Removes the Least Recently Used (LRU) attribute from the existing display for each cache line.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

190 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Enable/Disable Parity

Inverse LRU

Copy Cache

Export Cache

Search

Search Again

Preserve Sorting

View Memory

Lock Line

Invalidate Line

Flush Line

Synchronize Line

Lock Way

Unlock Way

Lock Ways

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Table 5-23. Cache View Toolbar Menu Options (continued)

Option Description

Turns on/off the line data parity checksum calculation.

Displays the inverse of the Least Recently Used attribute for each cache line.

Copies the cache contents to the system clipboard.

Exports the cache contents to a file.

Finds an occurrence of a string in the cache lines.

Finds the next occurrence of a string in the cache lines.

Preserves sorting of the cache when the cache data is updated and the cache is refreshing. This option is disabled by default. If enabled, every operation that triggers cache refresh (such as step, run to breakpoint) will have to wait for cache data loading and sorting.

Allows you to view the corresponding memory for the selected cache lines.

Locks the selected cache lines.

Invalidates the selected cache lines.

Flushes the entire contents of the selected cache lines.

Synchronizes selected cache data with memory data.

Locks the cache ways specified with the

Lock Ways menu option. Locking a cache way means that the data contained in that way must not change. If the cache needs to discard a line, it will not discard locked lines (such as lines explicitly locked, or lines belonging to locked ways).

Unlocks the cache ways specified with the Lock Ways menu option.

Specifies the cache ways on which the

Lock Way and

Unlock Way menu options operate.

5.9 Changing Program Counter Value

This section explains how to change the program counter value in the CodeWarrior IDE to make the debugger execute a specific line of code.

To change the program counter value, follow these steps:

1. Start a debugging session.

2. In the Editor view, place the cursor on the line that you want the debugger to execute next.

3. Right-click in the Editor view.

A context menu appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

191

Hard resetting

4. From the context menu, select Move To Line.

The CodeWarrior IDE modifies the program counter according to the specified location.

The Editor view shows the new location.

5.10 Hard resetting

Use the reset hard command in the Debugger Shell view to send a hard reset signal to the target processor.

NOTE

The Hard Reset command is enabled only if the debug hardware you are using supports it.

Tip

You can also perform a hard reset by clicking Reset ( ) on the Debug perspective toolbar.

5.11 Per Core Reset

This section describes how to enable per core reset.

To enable, follow the steps listed below:

1. Select Run > Debug Configurations from the IDE menu bar.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears.

2. Expand the CodeWarrior tree control, and select the desired target core.

3. In the right panel, click Edit from the Target settings group.

The Properties for <target> dialog box appears.

4. Click Edit.

The Properties for <target> Target dialog box with Hardware or Simulator

Target page in the right panel appears, as the Figure 5-31 shows.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

192 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-31. Properties for <target> Target Dialog Box

5. Select the checkbox in the Core reset column, corresponding to the desired target in

the Target column ( Figure 5-31 ).

6. Click OK.

The Properties for <target> Target dialog box closes and the core reset is enabled for the selected target.

NOTE

Per-core reset affects only the debugged core if the corresponding Core reset option is selected.

NOTE

Core reset will be ignored when the current core is the first debugged core from the processor and Execute target reset or the Processor reset checkboxes are checked.

5.12 Setting Stack Depth

This section describes how to control the depth of the call stack displayed by the debugger.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

193

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Wizard

Select Window > Preferences > C/C++ > Debug > Maximum stack crawl depth option to set the depth of the stack to read and display. Showing all levels of calls when you are examining function calls several levels deep can sometimes make stepping through code more time consuming. Therefore, you can use this menu option to reduce the depth of calls that the debugger displays.

5.13 Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Wizard

The Import a CodeWarrior Executable file wizard helps you to import a CodeWarrior executable file and create a new project.

To use the Import a CodeWarrior Executable file wizard, perform these steps:

1. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select File > Import.

The Import wizard launches and the Select page appears, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-32. Import Wizard - Selecting CodeWarrior Executable Importer

2. Expand the CodeWarrior group.

3. Select the CodeWarrior Executable Importer to import a StarCore

.eld

file.

4. Click Next.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

194 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

The wizard name changes to Import a CodeWarrior Executable file and the

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file page appears.

The following sections describe the various pages that the wizard displays as it assists you in importing an executable (.eld) file:

•

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Page

•

Import C/C++/Assembler Executable Files Page

•

Processor Page

•

Debug Target Settings Page

5.13.1 Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Page

Use the Import a CodeWarrior Executable file page to specify the name and location for your project.

Figure 5-33. StarCore Executable - Import a CodeWarrior Executable File Page

The table below describes the options available on this page.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

195

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Wizard

Table 5-24. Import a CodeWarrior Executable file page settings

Project name

Location

Option

Use default location

Description

Specify the name of the project. The specified name identifies the project created for debugging (but not building) the executable file.

If you select this option, the project files required to build the program are stored in the current workspace directory of the workbench. If you clear this option, the project files are stored in the directory that you specify in the Location option.

Specifies the directory that contains the project files. Use the Browse button to navigate to the desired directory. This option is only available when the

Use default location

option is cleared.

5.13.2 Import C/C++/Assembler Executable Files Page

Use the Import C/C++/Assembler Executable Files page to select an executable file or a folder to search for C/C++/assembler executable files.

Figure 5-34. StarCore Executable - Import C/C++/Assembler Executable Files Page

The table below explains the options available on the page.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

196 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

File to import

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Table 5-25. Import C/C++/Assembler Executable Files page settings

Option

Copy the selected file to current project folder

Description

Specifies the C/C++/assembler executable file. Click

Browse

to choose an executable file.

Select this option to copy the executable file in the project folder.

5.13.3 Processor Page

Use the Processor page to specify the processor family for the imported executable file.

Figure 5-35. StarCore Executable - Processor Page

The table below describes the options available on the page.

Processor

Option

Table 5-26. Processor page settings

Description

Expand the processor family and select the appropriate target processor for the execution of the specified executable file.

Tip: You can also type the processor name in the text box.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

197

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Wizard

5.13.4 Debug Target Settings Page

Use the Debug Target Settings page to specify debugger connection type, board type, launch configuration type, and connection type for your project.

This page also allows you to configure connection settings for your project.

Figure 5-36. StarCore Executable - Debug Target Settings Page

The table below describes the options available on the page.

Option

Debugger Connection Types

Board

Launch

Connection

Table 5-27. Debug Target Settings page settings

Description

Specifies what target the program executes on.

• Hardware: Select to execute the program on the hardware available for the product.

• Simulator: Select to execute the program on a software simulator.

•

Emulator: Select to execute the program on a hardware emulator.

Specifies the hardware (board) supported by the selected processor.

Specifies the launch configurations and corresponding connection configurations, supported by the selected processor.

Specifies the connection configuration used by the project.

•

Default: Select to create a new connection with default configuration.

• Create New: Select to create a new connection configuration manually.

•

Edit Remote Systems: Select to edit existing remote systems.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

198 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Option

Connection Type

TAP address

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Table 5-27. Debug Target Settings page settings (continued)

Description

Specifies the interface to communicate with the hardware.

Enter the IP address of the selected TAP device.

5.14 Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

You can use the

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file wizard to debug an externally built executable file, that is, an executable (

.eld

) file that has no associated CodeWarrior project.

For example, you can debug a

.eld

file that was generated using a different IDE. The process of debugging an externally built executable file can be divided into the following tasks:

•

Import an Executable File

•

Edit the Launch Configuration

•

Specify the Source Lookup Path

•

Debug Executable File

5.14.1 Import an Executable File

First of all, you need to import the executable file that you want the CodeWarrior IDE to debug.

The IDE imports the executable file into a new project.

To import an externally built executable file, follow these steps:

1. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select File > Import.

The Import wizard appears.

2. Expand the CodeWarrior group.

3. Select CodeWarrior Executable Importer to import a StarCore

.eld

file.

4. Click Next.

The wizard name changes to Import a CodeWarrior Executable file and the

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file page appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

199

Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

5. In the Project name text box, enter the name of the project. This name identifies the project that the IDE creates for debugging (but not building) the executable file.

6. Clear the Use default location checkbox and click Browse to specify a different location for the new project. By default, the Use default location checkbox is selected.

7. Click Next.

The Import C/C++/Assembler Executable Files page appears.

8. Click Browse.

The Select file dialog box appears. Use the dialog box to navigate to the executable file that you want to debug.

9. Select the required file and click Open.

The Select file dialog box closes. The path to the executable file appears in the File

to import text box.

10. Check the Copy the selected file to current project folder checkbox to copy the executable file in the current workspace.

11. Click Next.

The Processor page appears.

12. Select the appropriate target processor from the StarCore Family list.

13. Click Next.

The Debug Target Settings page appears.

14. Select a debugger connection type for the execution of the specified executable file:

• Simulator: If you select this option, the program executes on a software simulator.

• Hardware: If you select this option, the program executes on the hardware available for the product.

15. Select the connection type you want to use, from the Debugger Connection Types group.

16. Select the board, you plan to use, from the Board drop-down list.

17. Select the launch configurations, that you want to include in your project and the corresponding connection configuration.

NOTE

For more information on remote systems, see CodeWarrior

Development Studio Common Features Guide

.

18. Click Finish.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

200 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

The CodeWarrior Executable Importer wizard creates a new project according to your specifications. You can access the project from the CodeWarrior Projects view in the IDE.

5.14.2 Edit the Launch Configuration

Using the tabs of the Debug Configurations dialog box, you can change the launch configuration settings that you specified while importing the

.eld

file.

To edit the launch configuration for your executable file, follow these steps:

1. Click the Debugger tab of the Debug Configurations dialog box.

The corresponding page appears.

2. Configure the debugger options as appropriate for your executable file.

For example, specify the appropriate target processor, any initialization files, and connection protocol.

5.14.3 Specify the Source Lookup Path

Source lookup path is specified in terms of the compilation path and the local file system path.

The CodeWarrior debugger uses both these paths to debug the executable file.

The compilation path is the path to the original project that built the executable file. If the original project is from an IDE on a different computer, you need to specify the compilation path in terms of the file system on that computer.

The local file system path is the path to the project that the CodeWarrior IDE creates to debug the executable file.

The CodeWarrior IDE supports automatic as well as manual path mapping.

In this section:

•

Automatic Path Mapping

•

Manual Path Mapping

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

201

Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

5.14.3.1 Automatic Path Mapping

This section describes how to set automatic path mapping for your project.

The Automatic Path Mapping feature focuses on reducing as much as possible the manual steps required by the user to set up the path mapping settings to support source level debugging.

For automatic path mapping, use these steps:

1. In the CodeWarrior Projects view, expand Binaries folder.

2. Right-click the

*.eld

file and select Properties from the context menu that appears.

The Properties for <project>.eld dialog box appears.

3. Select Path Mappings from the list.

The Path Mappings page appears. The Path Mapping Configuration page displays every path mapping settings for the launch configurations associated with a project.

You can edit either a single set of settings for all launch configurations associated with a project or the settings for a given launch configuration by selecting the appropriate value from the launch configuration combo box.

Under each path mapping, the table displays a list of source files that exist in the binary executable that share the same source mapping prefix. In the Local Path column, a green ( ) is displayed if the file exists after being mapped by the destination path or a red ( ) if it does not. Also, the local path itself is displayed in red if it does not exist on the local file system.

A default folder named Files Not Mapped is created if the user explicitly removes existing mappings. All unmapped files that are not found on the file system are automatically shown under this folder.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

202 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-37. Automatic Path Mapping

The table below describes various options available in the Path Mappings page.

Options

Auto Correct

Add

Remove

Edit

Up

Down

Table 5-28. Automatic Path Mappings

Options

Description

The Auto Correct button automatically iterate through all the files not found on the file system and attempt to group them with their common prefix. This action often generates satisfactory results from the source files listed in the binaries so that the manual steps required by the user are kept at a minimum.

The Add button allows you to create a new Path Mapping entry. If any paths are selected, the dialog will be pre-initialized with their common prefix.

The Remove button allows you to remove any path mapping or default entry.

The Edit button allows you to change the values of the selected path mapping entry. Editing non-path mapping entry is not supported.

The Up button allows the user to reorder the entries by moving the selected entry up in the list. Note that path mappings need always to be grouped together, and as such moving up the top most path mapping will always move its siblings above the preceding entry as well.

The

Down button allows the user to reorder the entries by moving the selected entry down in the list. Note that path mappings need always to be

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

203

Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

Table 5-28. Automatic Path Mappings Options

(continued)

Options

Restore Defaults

Description

grouped together, and as such moving down the bottom most path mapping will always move its siblings below the following entry as well.

The Restore Defaults button resets the launch configuration path mappings settings to their previous values, including the library path mapping automatically generated by the APM plug-in.

NOTE

If you create a new path mappings manually from the source lookup path, the source files are automatically resorted to their most likely path mapping parent.

4. Click OK.

The Path Mappings dialog box closes.

5.14.3.2 Manual Path Mapping

This section describes how to set path mapping manually in your project.

To manually specify the source lookup path for the newly imported executable file, use these steps:

1. Click the Source tab of the Debug Configurations dialog box.

The corresponding page appears, as shown in the figure below.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

204 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-38. Debug Configurations - Source Page

Like Source tab, you can also use Edit Source Lookup Path dialog box to manually specify the source lookup path. To open the Edit Source Lookup Path dialog box, right-click in the Debug view and select Edit Source Lookup.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

205

Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

Figure 5-39. Edit Source Lookup Path Dialog Box

2. Click Add.

The Add Source dialog box appears.

3. Select Path Mapping (see the figure below).

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

206 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

Figure 5-40. Add Source Dialog Box

4. Click OK.

The Path Mappings dialog box appears (shown in the figure below).

5. In the Name text box, enter the name of the new path mapping.

The name you enter also appears in the Source Lookup Path list of the Source page.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

207

Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

Figure 5-41. Path Mappings Dialog Box

6. Click Add.

7. In the Compilation path text box, enter the path to the parent project of the executable file, relative to the computer that generated the file.

For example, the computer on which you debug the executable file is not the same computer that generated that executable file. On the computer that generated the executable file, the path to the parent project is

D:\workspace\originalproject

. Enter this path in the Compilation path text box.

Tip

You can use the IDE to discover the path to the parent project of the executable file, relative to the computer that generated the file. In the C/C++ Projects view of the C/C+

+ perspective, expand the project that contains the executable file that you want to debug. Next, expand the group that has the name of the executable file itself. A list of paths appears, relative to the computer that generated the file. Search this list for the names of source files used to build the executable file. The path to the parent project of one of these source files is the path you should enter in the

Compilation path text box.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

208 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 5 Working with Debugger

8. In the Local file system path text box, enter the path to the parent project of the executable file, relative to your computer. Alternatively, click the Browse button to specify the parent project.

Suppose the computer on which you debug the executable file is not the same computer that generated that executable file. On your current computer, the path to the parent project of the executable file is

C:\projects\thisproject

. Enter this path in the Local file system path text box.

9. Click OK.

The Path Mappings dialog box closes. The mapping information now appears under the path mapping shown in the Source Lookup Path list of the Source page.

10. If needed, change the order in which the IDE searches the paths.

The IDE searches the paths in the order shown in the Source Lookup Path list, stopping at the first match. To change this order, select a path, then click the Up or

Down button to change its position in the list.

11. Click Apply.

The IDE saves your changes.

5.14.4 Debug Executable File

You can use the CodeWarrior debugger to debug the externally built executable file.

To debug the executable file:

1. Select the project in the CodeWarrior Projects view.

2. Click the Debug button from the IDE toolbar.

The IDE switches to Debug perspective listing the debugging output.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

209

Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

210 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 6

Target Initialization File

This chapter explains the target initialization file and lists an example.

The initialization file is a text file that contains commands that tell the debugger how to initialize your hardware after reset but before downloading code. Use the initialization file commands to write values to various registers, core registers, and memory locations.

To use an initialization file, you must check the Use Initialization File box and specify the name of your initialization file in the Debugger settings panel.

The target initialization files for the StarCore 3900FP DSP targets are available at:

Windows

<CWInstallDir>\SC\StarCore_Support\Initialization_Files\RegisterConfigFiles\

For example,

B4860_QDS_Init.tcl

.

NOTE

You can customize the contents of

B4860_QDS_Init.tcl

if needed.

For details about commands, see

Debugger Shell Command List

.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

211

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

212 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 7

Memory Configuration File

This chapter explains the memory configuration file, and lists an example.

The memory configuration file is a text file that contains commands that tell the compiler how to initialize the hardware memory after reset, but before downloading code. Use the memory configuration files to write values to various memory locations.

The memory configuration files are available at the following location:

<CWinstallDir>\SC\StarCore_Support\Initialization_Files\MemoryConfigFiles

The syntax for memory configuration is defined in each of memory configuration files available with the CodeWarrior layout. For example, you can refer to the

B4860_Memory_Example.mem

file at the mentioned location.

To specify memory configuration file for a target:

1. Open the Debug Configurations dialog box.

2. Click the Edit button in the Target settings area.

The Properties for <connection> dialog box appears.

3. Click the Edit button next to the Target field.

The Properties for <project> Target dialog box appears.

4. Select the target for which you want to specify the memory file from the Target type drop-down list.

5. Click the Memory tab.

6. Check the Memory configuration checkbox for the target or core(s) for which you want to specify the memory file.

7. Click the corresponding Memory configuration file column.

8. Locate and specify a valid memory configuration file using the Memory

Configuration File dialog box that appears on clicking the Ellipse button in the

Memory configuration file column.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

213

Figure 7-1. Specify Memory Configuration File

9. Click OK.

The specified memory configuration file appears in the Memory configuration file column.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

214 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8

CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

CodeWarrior supports a command-line interface to some of its features including the debugger.

You can use the command-line interface together with various scripting engines, such as the Microsoft® Visual Basic® script engine, the Java™ script engine, TCL, Python, and

Perl. You can even issue a command that saves the command-line activity to a log file.

This chapter explains:

•

Working with Debugger Shell

•

Tcl Support

•

Command-Line Debugging Tasks

•

Debugger Shell Command List

8.1 Working with Debugger Shell

You use the Debugger Shell view to issue command lines to the IDE.

For example, you enter the command debug

in this window to start a debugging session.

The window lists the standard output and standard error streams of command-line activity.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

215

Working with Debugger Shell

Figure 8-1. Debugger Shell View

To open the Debugger Shell view, perform these steps:

1. Switch the IDE to the Debug perspective and start a debugging session.

2. Select Window > Show View > Debugger Shell.

The Debugger Shell view appears.

NOTE

Alternatively, select Window > Show View > Other.

Expand the Debug tree control in the Show View dialog box, select Debugger Shell, and click OK.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

216 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Figure 8-2. Show View - Debugger Shell

To issue a command-line command, type the desired command at the command prompt

(

%>

) in the Debugger Shell view, then press Enter or Return. The command-line debugger executes the specified command.

If you work with hardware as part of your project, you can use the command-line debugger to issue commands to the debugger while the hardware is running.

NOTE

To list the commands the command-line debugger supports, type help

at the command prompt and press Enter. The help command lists each supported command along with a brief description of each command.

Tip

To view page-wise listing of the debugger shell commands, right-click in the Debugger Shell view and select Paging from the context menu. Alternatively, click the Enable Paging icon.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

217

Tcl Support

8.2 Tcl Support

This section provides the following details on using the command-line debugger with Tcl script engine.

•

Resolution of Conflicting Command Names

•

Execution of Script Files

•

Tcl Startup Script

8.2.1 Resolution of Conflicting Command Names

The names of several command-line debugger commands conflict with the Tcl commands.

The following table explains how the command-line debugger resolves such conflicts (if the mode is set to auto).

bp

Table 8-1. Resolving Conflicting Commands

Command Resolution

If you pass the command-line debugger a bp command from within a script and the command has arguments, the debugger invokes the Tcl break command. Otherwise, the debugger interprets a break command as a command to control breakpoints.

8.2.2 Execution of Script Files

Tcl usually executes a script file as one large block, returning only after execution of the entire file.

For the run command, however, the command-line debugger executes script files line-byline. If a particular line is not a complete Tcl command, the debugger appends the next line. The debugger continues appending lines until it gets a complete Tcl script block.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

218 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

The following listing lists code that includes a script. For the Tcl source command, the debugger executes this script as one block. But for the run debug command, the debugger executes this script as two blocks: the set statement and the while loop.

Listing: Example Tcl Script

set x 0; while {$x < 5}

{ puts "x is $x"; set x [expr $x + 1]

}

NOTE

The run debug command synchronizes debug events between blocks in a script file. For example, after a go, next, or step command, run polls the debug thread state and does not execute the next line or block until the debug thread terminates.

However, the Tcl source command does not consider the debug thread state. Consequently, use the run debug command to execute script files that contain these debug commands: debug, go, next, stop, and kill.

8.2.3 Tcl Startup Script

The command-line debugger can automatically run a Tcl script each time you open the command-line debugger window.

This script is called a startup script.

You can use both Tcl and command-line debugger commands in the startup script. For example, you might include commands that set an alias or a define color configuration in a startup script.

To create a command-line debugger startup script, follow these steps:

1. Put the desired Tcl and command-line debugger commands in a text file.

2. Name this file tcld.tcl

.

3. Place tcld.tcl

in one of the directories listed below.

• On a Windows® PC, put tcld.tcl

in the system directory.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

219

Command-Line Debugging Tasks

For example, put tcld.tcl

in the

WINDOWS

directory.

• On a Solaris Workstation, put tcld.tcl

in your home directory.

NOTE

There is no synchronization of debug events in the startup script. Consequently, put the c debug command to the startup script and place these debug commands in another script so they will execute properly: debug

, go

, stop

, kill

, next

, and step

.

8.3 Command-Line Debugging Tasks

This section provides instructions for common command-line debugging tasks.

See the following table for details.

Table 8-2. Common Command-Line Debugging Tasks

Task

Open the Debugger Shell

Use the help command

Enter a command

View debug command hints

Instruction

Select

Windows > Show View >

Others > Debugger Shell.

1. On the Debugger shell command prompt (%>), type help. 2. Press Enter.

1. On the Debugger shell, type a command followed by a space. 2. Type any valid command-line options, separating each with a space. 3. Press

Enter.

Type alias followed by a space

Comments

The Debugger Shell view appears.

The Command List for the CodeWarrior tool appears.

You can use shortcuts instead of complete command names, such as k for kill.

The syntax for the rest of the command appears.

Review previous commands Press Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys

Clear command from the command line Press the Esc key

Stop an executing script Press the Esc key

Toggle between insert/overwrite mode Press the Insert key

Scroll up/ down a page

Scroll left/right one column

Scroll to beginning or end of buffer

Press Page Up or Page Down key

Press Ctrl-Left Arrow or Ctrl-Right Arrow keys

Press Ctrl-Home or Ctrl-End keys

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

220 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

8.4 Debugger Shell Command List

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

This section lists commands that are unique to the CodeWarrior tool.

The list of the commands that can be used in the CodeWarrior Debugger Shell view is as follows:

NOTE

For information on the Tcl built-in commands, visit http:// sourceforge.net/projects/tcl .

Table 8-3. Debugger Shell Command List

about

cd

config

dir

evaluate

fl::checksum

fl::disconnect

fl::image

fl::target

funcs

go

jtagclock

loadsym

mc::go

mc::reset

mc::type

nexti pwd

redirect reset

run

sc::setReset setpicloadaddr

step

switchtarget

wait

alias

change

copy

disassemble

finish

fl::device fl::dump

fl::protect

fl::verify

getIDEpref

help

kill

log

mc::group mc::restart

mem

oneframe

quitIDE

refresh

restart save

sc::getPhysicalAddress

stack

stepi

system

watchpoint

bp

cls

debug

display

fl::blankcheck

fl::diagnose

fl::erase

fl::secure

fl::write

getpid

history

launch

mc::config

mc::kill

mc::stop

next

protocol

radix

reg

restore

sc::setMaxAccessLength

setpc

status

stop

var

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

221

Debugger Shell Command List

8.4.1 about

Lists the version information.

Syntax

about

8.4.2 alias

Creates an alias for a debug command, removes such an alias, or lists all current aliases.

Syntax

alias [<alias> [<command>]]

Parameters

alias

Lists current aliases.

Examples

Table 8-4

lists and defines examples of the alias command.

Table 8-4. alias Command-Line Debugger Command - Examples

alias alias ls dir alias ls

Command Description

Lists current aliases.

Issue the dir command when ls is typed.

Remove the alias ls.

8.4.3 bp

Sets a breakpoint, removes a breakpoint, or lists the current breakpoints.

Syntax

bp [-{hw|sw|auto}] {<func>|[<ms>:]<addr>|<file> <line> [<column>]}

bp all|#<id>|<func>|<addr> off|enable|disable

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

222 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Examples

Table 8-5

lists and defines examples of the bp command.

Table 8-5. bp Command-Line Debugger Command - Examples

Command

bp bp -hw fn bp -autofile.cpp 101 1 bp fn off bp 10343 bp #4 off bp #4 disable bp #4 cond x == 3 bp #4 cond Hit Count % 3 == 0

Description

Lists all breakpoints.

Set hardware breakpoint at function fn().

Set an auto breakpoint on file file.cpp at line 101, column 1.

Remove the breakpoint at function fn().

Set a breakpoint at memory address 10343.

Remove the breakpoint number 4.

Disable the breakpoint number 4.

Set the condition for breakpoint number 4 to fire only if x == 3.

Break every third time. Hit Count corresponds to the breakpoint property of the same name.

8.4.4 cd

Changes to a different directory or lists the current directory.

Pressing the Tab key completes the directory name automatically.

Syntax

cd [<path>]

Parameter

path

Directory pathname; accepts asterisks and wildcards.

Examples

Table 8-6

lists and defines examples of the cd command.

Table 8-6. cd Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

cd cd c: cd d:/mw/0622/ test cd c:p*s

Command Description

Lists current directory.

Changes to the C: drive root directory.

Changes to the specified D: drive directory

Changes to any C: drive directory whose name starts with p and ends with s.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

223

Debugger Shell Command List

8.4.5 change

Changes the contents of register, memory location, block of registers, or memory locations.

Syntax

change <addr-spec> [<range>] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] <value>

change <addr-spec>{..<addr>|#<n>} [<range>] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] <value>

change <reg-spec> [<n>] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] <value>

change <reg-spec>{..<reg>|#<n>} [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] <value>

change <var-spec> [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] <value>

change v <var> [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] <value>

Parameter

<addr-spec> [<ms>:]<addr>

On architectures supporting multiple memory spaces, specifies the memory space in which <addr> is to be found.

See the help for the option

-ms

of display or mem for more information on memory spaces. If unspecified, the setting config MemIdentifier is used.

<addr>

Target address in hex format.

<count>

Number of memory cells.

x<cell-size>

Memory is displayed in units called cells, where each cell consists of <cell-size> bytes. If unspecified, the setting config MemWidth is used.

h<access-size>

Memory is accessed with a hardware access size of <access-size> bytes.

If unspecified, the setting config MemWidth is used.

%<conv>

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

224 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Specifies the type of the data. Possible values for <conv> are given below. The default conversion is set by the radix command for memory and registers and by the config var command for variables.

• %x Hexadecimal

• %d Signed decimal

• %u Unsigned decimal

• %f Floating point

NOTE

You can not access array elements in Tcl except through array

and set

commands. Therefore, to use the change

or var command on an array element, enclose it in curly braces

{}

.

Examples

The examples assume the following settings:

• radix x

• config MemIdentifier 0

• config MemWidth 32

• config MemAccess 32

• config MemSwap off

Table 8-7

lists and defines Memory examples of the change command.

Table 8-7. change Command-Line Debugger Command-Memory Examples

change 10000 10 change 1:10000 20 change 10000 16 20

Command

change 10000 16x1h8 31 change 10000 -s %d 200 change {x[1]} 10 change {t1.x} 2

Description

Change memory range 0x10000-3 to 0x10 (because radix is hex).

Change memory range 0x10000-3, memory space 1, to

0x20.

Change each of 16 cells in the memory range 0x10000-3f to 0x20.

Change each of 16, 1-byte cells to 0x31, using a hardware access size of 8-bytes per write.

Change memory range 0x10000-3 to c8000000.

Change the second element in the array x to the value 10.

Change the value of the variable x in the structure t1 to 2.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

225

Debugger Shell Command List

Table 8-8

lists and defines Register examples of the change command.

Table 8-8. change Command-Line Debugger Command-Register Examples

Command

change R1 123 change R1..R5 5432 change "General Purpose Registers/R1" 100

Description

Change register R1 to 0x123.

Change registers R1 through R5 to 0x5432.

Change register R1 in the General Purpose Register group to

0x100.

Table 8-9

lists and defines Variable examples of the change command.

Table 8-9. change Command-Line Debugger Command-Variable Examples

change myVar 10

Command Description

Change the value of variable myVar to 16 (0x10)

8.4.6 cls

Clears the command line debugger window.

Syntax

cls

8.4.7 config

Lists current configuration information.

Provides the name of the default project or build target, or configures:

• command-line debugger window colors.

• command-line debugger window scrolling size.

• command-line debugger window mode.

• Default build target

• Hexadecimal prefix

• Memory identifier

• Processor name

• Subprocessor name

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

226 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Syntax

conf[ig] [ c[olor] [r | m | c | s | e | n]

text_color [background_color] |

m[ode] [ dsp | tcl | auto] |

s[croll] number_of_lines |

h[exprefix] hexadecimal_prefix |

mem[identifier] memory_identifier |

p[rocessor] processor_name [subprocessor_name] ]

Parameter

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

color text indicators - r (registers), m (memory), c (commands), s (script), e (errors), or n (normal)

text_color

Text color values for red, green, and blue, each from 0 through 255.

background_color

Background color values for red, green, and blue, each from 0 through 255.

mode

Command-name conflict resolution mode:

• dsp: use command-line debug commands

• tcl: use tcl commands

• auto: resolve automatically

number_of_lines

Number of lines to scroll.

hexadecimal_prefix

Prefix for display of hexadecimal values.

memory_identifier

Memory identifier.

processor_name

Name or identifier of target processor.

subprocessor_name

Name or identifier of target subprocessor.

target_name

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

227

Debugger Shell Command List

Name of build target.

Examples

Table 8-10 lists and defines examples of the config command.

Table 8-10. config Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command

config config c e $ff $0 $0 config c r $0 $0 $0 $ff $ff $ff config m dsp config hexprefix 0x config memidentifier m config processor 8101 config project config target config target debug release x86

Description

Lists current configuration information.

Sets error text to red.

Sets register display to black, on a white background.

Sets clash resolution to dsp mode.

Specifies 0x prefix for hexadecimal values.

Sets memory identifier to m.

Sets processor to 8101.

Lists default-project name.

Lists default build-target name.

Changes default build-target name to debug release x86.

8.4.8 copy

Copies contents of a memory address or address block to another memory location.

Syntax

copy [<ms>:]<addr>[..<addr>|#<bytes>] [<ms>:]<addr>

Parameter

<addr>

One of these memory-address specifications:

• A single address

• First address of the destination memory block.

Examples

Table 8-11 lists and defines examples of the copy command.

Table 8-11. copy Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

copy 00..1f 30

Command Description

Copy memory addresses 00 through 1f to address 30.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

228 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Table 8-11. copy Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples (continued)

copy 20#10 50

Command Description

Copy 10 memory locations beginning at memory location 20 to memory beginning at location 50.

8.4.9 debug

Launches a debug session.

Syntax

debug [<index> | <debug-config-name>]

Examples

Table 8-12 lists and defines examples of the debug command.

Table 8-12. debug Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

debug debug 3

Command

debug {My Launch Config}

Description

Start debugging using the default launch configuration, which is the last debugged configuration if one exists and index 0 otherwise.

Start debugging using the launch configuration at index 3.

Type launch for the current set of launch configurations.

Start debugging using the launch configuration named My

Launch Config. Type launch for the current set of launch configurations.

8.4.10 dir

Lists directory contents.

Syntax

dir [path|files]

Examples

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

229

Debugger Shell Command List

Table 8-13 lists and defines examples of the dir command.

dir di *.txt

dir c:/tmp dir /ad

Table 8-13. dir Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command Description

Lists all files of the current directory.

Lists all current-directory files that have the .txt file name extension.

Lists all files in the tmp directory on the C: drive.

Lists only the subdirectories of the current directory.

8.4.11 disassemble

Disassembles the instructions of the specified memory block.

Syntax

disassemble

disassemble pc|[<ms>:]<addr> [<count>]

disassemble reset

disassemble [<ms>:]<a1>{..<a2>|#<n>}

Parameter

[none]

With no options, the next block of instructions is listed. After a target stop event, the next block starts at the PC.

[<ms>:]<addr>

Target address in hex. On targets with multiple memory spaces, a memory space id can be specified.

pc

The current program counter.

<count>

Number of instructions to be listed.

reset

Reset the next block to the PC and the instruction count to one screen.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

230 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

<a1>{..<a2>|#<n>}

Specifies a range of memory either by two endpoints, <a1> and <a2>, or by a startpoint and a count, <a1> and <n>.

Examples

Table 8-14 lists and defines examples of the disassemble command.

Table 8-14. disassemble Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

disassemble disassemble reset disassemble pc disassemble pc 4

Command

disassemble 1000 disassemble p:1000 4

Description

Lists the next block of instructions.

Reset the next block to the PC and the instruction count to one screenful.

Lists instructions starting at the PC.

Lists 4 instructions starting at the PC. Sets the instruction count to 4.

Lists instructions starting at address 0x1000.

Lists 4 instructions from memory space p, address 1000. Sets the instruction count to 4.

8.4.12 display

Lists the contents of a register or memory location.

This command lists all register sets of a target, adds register sets, registers, or memory locations, or removes register sets, registers, or memory locations.

Syntax

display <addr-spec> [<range>] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] [-np]

display -ms

display <addr-spec>{..<addr>|#<n>} [<range>] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] [-np]

display <reg-spec> [<n>] [-{d|nr|nv|np} ...] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>]

display <reg-spec>{..<reg>|#<n>} [-{d|nr|nv|np} ...] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>]

display all|r:|nr: [-{d|nr|nv|np} ...] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>]

display [-]regset

display <var-spec> [-np] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>]

display v: [-np] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>]

Parameter

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

231

Debugger Shell Command List

<ms>

On architectures supporting multiple memory spaces, specifies the memory space in which

<addr>

is to be found.

<addr>

Target address in hex.

<range>

[<count>][x<cell-size>][h<access-size>] | [<count>] [{8,16,32,64}bit].

<count>

Number of memory cells.

x<cell-size>

Memory is displayed in units called cells, where each cell consists of <cell-size> bytes. If unspecified, the setting config MemWidth is used.

{8,16,32,64}bit

Sets both

<cell-size>

and

<access-size>

.

Examples

The examples assume the following settings:

• radix x

• config MemIdentifier 0

• config MemWidth 32

• config MemAccess 32

• config MemSwap off

Table 8-15 lists and defines examples of the display command.

Table 8-15. display Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

display 10000 display 1:10000 display 10000 8bit display 10000 -np display 10000 -s display 10000 %d

Command

display 10000 16 display 10000 16x1h8

Description

Display memory range 0x10000-3 as one cell.

Display memory range 0x10000-3, memory space 1, as one cell.

Display memory range 0x10000-3f as 16 cells.

Display 16, 1-byte cells, with a hardware access size of 8bytes per read.

Display one byte, with a hardware access size of one byte.

Return one cell, but don't print it to the Command Window.

Display one cell with the data endian-swapped.

Display one cell in decimal format.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

232 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Table 8-15. display Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples (continued)

display -ms

Command Description

Display the available memory spaces, if any.

display -regset display R1

List all the available register sets on the target chip.

Display the value of register R1.

display "General Purpose Registers/R1" display R1 -d

Display the value of register R1 in the General Purpose

Register group.

Display detailed "data book" contents of R1, including bitfields and definitions.

display "nr:General Purpose Registers/R1" 25

Beginning with register R1, display the next 25 registers.

Register groups are not recursively searched.

8.4.13 evaluate

Lists variable or expression.

Syntax

evaluate [#<format>] [-l] [<var|expr>]

Parameter

<format>

Output format and possible values:

#-, #Default

#d, #Signed

#u, #Unsigned

#h, #x, #Hex

#c, #Char

#s, #CString

#p, #PascalString

#f, #Float

#e, #Enum

#i, #Fixed

#o, #w, #Unicode

#b, #Binary

<none>, #Fract

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

233

Debugger Shell Command List

<none>, #Boolean

<none>, #SignedFixed

Examples

Table 8-16 lists and defines examples of the evaluate command.

Table 8-16. evaluate Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command

evaluate evaluate i evaluate #b i evaluate -l 10 evaluate -l myfile.c,10 evaluate -l +10

Description

List the types for all the variables in current and global stack.

Return the value of variable 'i'

Return the value of variable 'i' formatted in binary

Return the address for line 10 in the current file

Return the address for line 10 in file myfile.c

Return the address to an offset of 10 lines starting from the current line

8.4.14 finish

Executes until the current function returns.

Syntax

finish

8.4.15 fl::blankcheck

Tests that the flash device is in the blank state.

Syntax

fl::blankcheck

8.4.16 fl::checksum

Calculates a checksum.

Syntax

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

234 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

fl::checksum

8.4.17 fl::device

Defines the flash device.

Syntax

fl::device

8.4.18 fl::diagnose

Dumps flash information like ID, sector map, sector factory, protect status.

Syntax

fl::diagnose [full]

Parameter

full

Dumps sector status (programmed/erased). This could take a few minutes for large flashes

Remarks

Use fl::device

command prior to this command in order to set the flash device.

8.4.19 fl::disconnect

Closes the connection to the target.

Syntax

fl::disconnect

8.4.20 fl::dump

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

235

Debugger Shell Command List

Dumps the content of entire flash.

Syntax

fl::dump [all | -range start_addr end_addr] -o <file>

Parameter

-all

Dumps content of entire flash.

-range <start_addr> <end_addr>

Sets the range of flash region to be dumped.

-t <type>

Sets the type of flash region ("Motorola S-Record Format" or "Binary/Raw Format") to be dumped .

-o <file>

Dumps the flash to the specified file.

8.4.21 fl::erase

Erases the flash device.

Syntax

fl::erase

8.4.22 fl::image

Defines the flash image settings.

Syntax

fl::image

8.4.23 fl::protect

Protects the sectors.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

236 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Syntax

fl::protect [on | off]

Parameter

on | off

Enable or disable protection of sectors.

8.4.24 fl::secure

Secures the device

Syntax

fl::secure [on | off] [password <pass>]

Parameter

on | off

Secure or unsecure device.

password <pass>

Password used to secure the device.

8.4.25 fl::target

Defines the target configuration settings.

Syntax

fl::target

8.4.26 fl::verify

Verifies the flash device.

Syntax

fl::verify

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

237

Debugger Shell Command List

8.4.27 fl::write

Writes the flash device.

Syntax

fl::write

8.4.28 funcs

Displays information about functions.

Syntax

funcs [-all] <file> <line>

Parameter

[-all]

Displays information about the functions using all debug contexts.

<file>

Specifies the file name.

<line>

Specifies the line number.

Examples

Table 8-17 lists and defines examples of the funcs command.

Table 8-17. funcs Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

funcs main.c 100

Command

funcs -all main.c 100

Description

Display information about the functions containing line 100 in file main.c, using the active debug context

Display information about the functions containing line 100 in file main.c, using all debug contexts.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

238 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

8.4.29 getIDEpref

The command displays the value of the launch configuration attribute associated with the user-provided key;

<attribute_key>

and

<attribute_type>

are mandatory parameters.

Syntax

getIDEpref <attribute_key> <attribute_type>

Parameter

<attribute_type> = [bool | int | str | strlist]

8.4.30 getpid

List the ID of the process being debugged.

Syntax

getpid

8.4.31 go

Starts to debug your program from the current instruction.

Syntax

go [nowait | <timeout_s>]

Parameter

<none>

Run the default thread. The command may wait for a thread break event before returning, depending on the settings config runControlSync and config autoThreadSwitch.

nowait

Return immediately without waiting for a thread break event.

<timeout_s>

Maximum number of seconds to wait for a thread break event. Can be set to nowait.

Examples

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

239

Debugger Shell Command List

Table 8-18 lists and defines examples of the go command.

go go nowait go 5

Table 8-18. go Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command Description

Run the default thread.

Run the default thread without waiting for a thread break event.

Run the default thread. If config runControlSync is enabled, then the command will wait for a thread break event for a maximum of 5 seconds.

8.4.32 help

Lists debug command help in the command-line debugger window.

Syntax

help [-sort | -tree | <cmd>]

Parameter

command

Name or short-cut name of a command.

Examples

Table 8-19 lists and defines examples of the help command.

Table 8-19. help Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

help help b

Command Description

Lists all debug commands.

Lists help information for the break command.

8.4.33 history

Lists the history of the commands entered during the current debug session.

Syntax

history

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

240 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

8.4.34 jtagclock

Reads or updates the current JTAG clock speed.

Syntax

jtagclock <chain-position> [<speed-in-kHz>]

Parameter

<chain-position>

Specifies the chain position.

<speed-in-kHz>

Specifies the speed in kilo hertz.

Examples

Table 8-20 lists and defines examples of the help command.

Table 8-20. jtagclock Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

jtagclock 3 jtagclock 3 1000

Command Description

Read the current jtag clock speed for chain position 3.

update the current jtag clock speed to 1000 kHz for chain position 3.

8.4.35 kill

Stops one or all current debug sessions.

Syntax

kill [<index> ...]

Parameter

all

Specifier for all debug sessions.

Examples

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

241

Debugger Shell Command List

Table 8-21 lists and defines examples of the help command.

kill kill 0 1

Table 8-21. kill Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command Description

Kills the debug session for the current process.

Kills debug sessions 0 and 1.

8.4.36 launch

Lists the launch configurations.

Syntax

launch

8.4.37 loadsym

Load a symbolic file.

Syntax

loadsym

8.4.38 log

Logs the commands or lists entries of a debug session.

If issued with no parameters, the command lists all open log files.

Syntax

log c|s <filename>

log off [c|s] [all]

log

Parameter

c

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

242 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Command specifier.

s

Lists entry specifier.

<filename>

Name of a log file.

Examples

Table 8-22 lists and defines examples of the log command.

Table 8-22. log Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

log log s session.log

log off c log off log off all

Command Description

Lists currently opened log files.

Log all display entries to file session.log.

Close current command log file.

Close current command and log file.

Close all log files.

8.4.39 mc::config

List or edit multicore group options.

Syntax

mc::config

8.4.40 mc::go

Resumes multiple cores.

Syntax

mc::go

Examples

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

243

Debugger Shell Command List

Table 8-23 lists and defines examples of the mc::go command.

Table 8-23. mc::go Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command

debug {SBL1_FWK_core0_ADS}debug

{SBL1_FWK_core1_ADS}debug

{SBL1_FWK_core2_ADS}debug

{SBL1_FWK_core3_ADS}debug

{SBL1_FWK_core4_ADS}debug

{SBL1_FWK_core5_ADS}mc::go

Description

Sample usage of mc::go command.

8.4.41 mc::group

List or edit multicore groups.

Syntax

mc::group

8.4.42 mc::kill

Terminates multiple cores.

Syntax

mc::kill

8.4.43 mc::reset

Resets multiple cores.

Syntax

mc::reset

8.4.44 mc::restart

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

244 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Restarts multiple cores.

Syntax

mc::restart

8.4.45 mc::stop

Suspend multiple cores.

Syntax

mc::stop

8.4.46 mc::type

List or edit system types.

Syntax

mc::type

8.4.47 mem

Read and write one or more adjacent "cells" of memory, where a cell is defined as a contiguous block of bytes.

The cell size is determined by the <cell-size> parameter or by the using

MemWidth attribute of the config

command.

Syntax

Read memory

mem <addr-spec> [<range>] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] [-np]

Write memory

mem <addr-spec> [<range>] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] =<value>

Parameter

[none]

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

245

Debugger Shell Command List

With no options, the next block of memory is read.

<addr-spec> [<ms>:]<addr>

<ms>

On architectures supporting multiple memory spaces, specifies the memory space in which <addr> is to be found. See the help for the option -ms of display or mem for more information on memory spaces. If unspecified, the setting " config MemIdentifier

" is used.

<addr>

Target address in hex.

<range> [<count>][x<cell-size>][h<access-size>] | [<count>]

[{8,16,32,64}bit]

<count>

Number of memory cells.

x<cell-size>

Memory is displayed in units called cells, where each cell consists of <cell-size> bytes. If unspecified, the setting " config MemWidth

" is used.

h<access-size>

Memory is accessed with a hardware access size of <access-size> bytes. If unspecified, the setting " config MemAccess

" is used.

{8,16,32,64}bit

Sets both

<cell-size>

and

<access-size>

.

-np

Don't print anything to the display, only return the data.

-ms

On architectures supporting multiple memory spaces, displays the list of available memory spaces including a mnemonic and/or an integer index which may be used when specifying a target address.

-s|-ns

Specifies whether each value is to be swapped. For memory, specifies whether each cell is to be swapped. With a setting of

-ns

, target memory is written in order from lowest to highest byte address. Otherwise, each cell is endian swapped. If unspecified, the setting config MemSwap

is used.

%<conv>

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

246 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Specifies the type of the data. Possible values for

<conv>

are given below. The default conversion is set by the radix command for memory and registers and by the config var command for variables.

%x Hexadecimal.

%d Signed decimal.

%u Unsigned decimal.

%f Floating point.

%[E<n>]F Fixed or Fractional. The range of a fixed

point value depends on the (fixed) location

of the decimal point. The default location is

set by the config command option

"MemFixedIntBits".

%s Ascii.

Examples

Table 8-24 lists and defines examples of the mem command.

Table 8-24. mem Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

mem x:1000 4 mem m:1000 16bit 4

Command

mem m:1000 16bit 4 %d =48

Description

Read program memory starting from address 1000 for four

32-bit cells.

Read data memory starting from address 1000 for four 16-bit cells.

Starting at address 1000, write the decimal value 48 into data memory for four 16-bit cells

8.4.48 next

Runs to next source line or assembly instruction in current frame.

Syntax

next

Remarks

If you execute the next command interactively, the command returns immediately, and target-program execution starts. Then you can wait for execution to stop (for example, due to a breakpoint) or type the stop command.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

247

Debugger Shell Command List

If you execute the next command in a script, the command-line debugger polls until the debugger stops (for example, due to a breakpoint). Then the command line debugger executes the next command in the script. If this polling continues indefinitely because debugging does not stop, press the ESC key to stop the script.

8.4.49 nexti

Executes over function calls, if any, to the next assembly instruction.

Syntax

nexti

8.4.50 oneframe

Query or set the one-frame stack crawl mode for the current thread.

Syntax

oneframe

8.4.51 protocol

Executes a protocol plugin command (internal).

Syntax

protocol

8.4.52 pwd

Lists current working directory.

Syntax

pwd

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

248 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

8.4.53 quitIDE

Quits the IDE.

Syntax

quitIDE

8.4.54 radix

Lists or changes the default input radix (number base) for command entries, registers and memory locations.

Entering this command without any parameter values lists the current default radix.

Syntax

radix [x|d|u|b|f|h]

Parameter

x

Hexadecimal

d

Decimal

u

Unsigned decimal

b

Binary

f

Fractional

h

Hexadecimal

Examples

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

249

Debugger Shell Command List

Table 8-25 lists and defines examples of the radix command.

radix radix d radix x

Table 8-25. radix Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command Description

Lists the current setting.

Change the setting to decimal.

Change the setting to hexadecimal.

8.4.55 redirect

Redirects I/O streams of the current target process.

Syntax

redirect

8.4.56 refresh

Discard all cached target data and refresh views.

Syntax

refresh

8.4.57 reg

Read and write registers.

Syntax

reg

8.4.58 reset

Reset the target hardware.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

250 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Syntax

reset

8.4.59 restart

Restarts the current debug session.

Syntax

restart

8.4.60 restore

Write file contents to memory.

Syntax

restore

8.4.61 run

Launch a process.

Syntax

run

8.4.62 save

Saves the contents of memory locations to a binary file or a text file containing hexadecimal values.

Syntax

save -h|-b [<ms>:]<addr>... <filename> [-a|-o] [8bit|16bit|32bit|64bit]

Parameter

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

251

Debugger Shell Command List

-h|-b

Sets the output file format to hex or binary. For hex format, the address is also saved so that the contents can easily be restored with the "restore" command.

[<ms>:]<addr>

Address to read from. For architectures with multiple memory spaces, a memory space id may be specified.

-a

Append specifier. Instructs the command-line debugger to append the saved memory contents to the current contents of the specified file.

-o

Overwrite specifier: tells the debugger to overwrite any existing contents of the specified file.

Examples

Table 8-26 lists and defines examples of the save command.

Table 8-26. save Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command

set addressBlock1 "p:10..`31"set addressBlock2 "p:10000#20"save -h

$addressBlock1 $addressBlock2hexfile -a set addressBlock1 "p:10..`31"set addressBlock2 "p:10000#20"save -b

$addressBlock1 $addressBlock2binfile -o

Description

Dumps contents of two memory blocks to the text file hexfile.lod (in append mode).

Dumps contents of two memory blocks to the binary file binfile.lod (in overwrite mode).

8.4.63 sc::setMaxAccessLength

Sets the maximum amount of data accessible in one target operation.

Syntax

sc::setMaxAccessLength

Example

The following command sets a maximum of 1000 elements that can be read or written:

sc::setMaxAccessLength 1000

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

252 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

8.4.64 sc::setReset

Sets the reset mode.

Syntax

sc::setReset <mode>

Parameter

<mode>

Can be

ToUser

or

ToDebug

.

ToUser

sets the reset to run out of reset. For debug mode after reset, use

ToDebug

parameter.

8.4.65 sc::getPhysicalAddress

Returns the physical address that corresponds to the specified virtual address.

Use mem –ms

command, to view the list of supported memory spaces. For more

information, refer to the mem

command.

Syntax

sc::getPhysicalAddress <mem_space>:<virtual_address>

8.4.66 setpc

Set the value of the program counter register.

Syntax

setpc

8.4.67 setpicloadaddr

Indicate where a PIC executable is loaded.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

253

Debugger Shell Command List

Syntax

setpicloadaddr

8.4.68 stack

Print the call stack.

Syntax

stack

8.4.69 status

Lists the debug status of all existing active targets.

Syntax

status

8.4.70 step

Steps through a program, automatically executing the display command.

Syntax

step [asm|src] [into|over|out]

step [nve|nxt|fwd|end|aft]

Parameter

asm|src

Controls whether the step is performed at the assembly instruction level or the source code level.

into|over|out

Controls the type of step operation. If unspecified, into is used.

nve

Step non optimized action.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

254 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

nxt

Step next action.

fwd

Step forward action.

end

Step end of statement action.

aft

Step end all previous action.

Examples

Table 8-27 lists and defines examples of the step command.

Table 8-27. step Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

step step over step out step asm

Command Description

Step into the current source or assembly line.

Step over the current source or assembly line.

Step out of a function.

Step over a single assembly instruction.

8.4.71 stepi

Execute to the next assembly instruction.

Syntax

stepi

8.4.72 stop

Stops a running program (started by a go, step, or next command).

Syntax

stop

Examples

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

255

Debugger Shell Command List

Table 8-28 lists and defines examples of the stop command.

stop

Table 8-28. stop Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command Description

Using it after command go/step out/next, this will stop the target program.

8.4.73 switchtarget

Chooses a thread for subsequent commands.

Syntax

switchtarget [<index> | -cur | -ResetIndex]

Parameter

index

Session Index number.

Examples

Table 8-29 lists and defines examples of the switchtarget command.

Table 8-29. switchtarget Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command

switchtarget switchtarget 0 switchtarget -cur switchtarget -ResetIndex

Description

list currently available debug sessions.

choose the thread with index 0 list the index of the current thread.

reset the index counter to 0, not valid while debugging.

8.4.74 system

execute system command.

Syntax

system [command]

Parameter

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

256 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

command

Any system command that does not use a full screen display.

Examples

Table 8-30 lists and defines examples of the system command.

Table 8-30. system Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

system del *.tmp

Command Description

Delete from the current directory all files that have the .tmp

filename extension.

8.4.75 var

Read and write variables or C-expressions.

Syntax

Display variable

var

var <var-spec> [-np] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>]

var v: [-np] [-s|-ns] [%<conv>]

Modify variable

var <var-spec> [-s|-ns] [%<conv>] =<value>

Parameter

[none]

With no options, this is equivalent to using var v:

.

<var-spec> [v:]<var>

v:

If this option appears with no

<var>

following it, then all variables pertinent to the current scope are printed.

<var>

Symbolic name of the variable to print. Can be a C expression as well.

-np

Don't print anything to the display, only return the data.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

257

Debugger Shell Command List

-s|-ns

Specifies whether each value is to be swapped. For memory, specifies whether each cell is to be swapped. With a setting of

-ns

, target memory is written in order from lowest to highest byte address. Otherwise, each cell is endian swapped. If unspecified, the setting config MemSwap

is used.

%<conv>

Specifies the type of the data. Possible values for

<conv>

are given below. The default conversion is set by the radix command for memory and registers and by the config var command for variables.

%x Hexadecimal.

%d Signed decimal.

%u Unsigned decimal.

%f Floating point.

%[E<n>]F Fixed or Fractional. The range of a fixed

point value depends on the (fixed) location

of the decimal point. The default location is

set by the config command option

"MemFixedIntBits".

%s Ascii.

Examples

Table 8-31 lists and defines examples of the var command.

Table 8-31. var Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

var flag =0 var {x[2]} =11 var {t1.y} =3

Command Description

Set the value of the variable flag to 0.

Set the value of the third element in the array x to 11.

Set the value of the variable y in the structure t1 to 3.

8.4.76 wait

Tells the debugger to wait for a specified amount of time, or until you press the space bar.

Syntax

wait <time-ms>

Parameter

time-ms

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

258 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 8 CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

Number of milliseconds to wait.

Examples

Table 8-32 lists and defines examples of the wait command.

wait wait 2000

Table 8-32. wait Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command Description

Debugger waits until you press the space bar.

Wait for 2 seconds.

8.4.77 watchpoint

Sets, removes, disables, enables or list watchpoints. You can also set condition on watchpoint.

Syntax

watchpoint

watchpoint [-{r|w|rw}] {<var>|[<ms>:]<addr> <length>}

watchpoint all|#<id>|<var>|[<ms>:]<addr> off|enable|disable

watchpoint #<id> cond <c-expr>

Examples

Table 8-33 lists and defines examples of the watchpoint command.

Table 8-33. watchpoint Command-Line Debugger Command-Examples

Command

watchpoint watchpoint gData watchpoint -r gData watchpoint all off watchpoint #4 disable watchpoint 10343 4

Description

Display all watchpoints.

Set read-write (the default) watchpoint on variable gData.

Set read-only watchpoint on variable gData.

Remove all watchpoints.

Disable watchpoint number 4.

Set a watchpoint at memory address 10343 of length 4.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

259

Debugger Shell Command List

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

260 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 9

Multi-Core Debugging

This chapter explains how to use the multi-core debugging capability of the CodeWarrior debugger.

In this chapter:

•

Creating a JTAG Initialization File

•

Debugging Multi-Core Projects

•

Multi-Core Debugging Commands

9.1 Creating a JTAG Initialization File

This section explains how to create a JTAG initialization file that specifies the type and chain order of the cores you want to debug.

The listing below shows the JTAG initialization file for a StarCore processor and a generic device, connected to a JTAG chain.

Listing 9-1. JTAG Initialization File for Generic Device Connected to JTAG Chain

# JTAG Initialization File

#

# Standards for this file

# 1. Comments begin with the character '#'.

# 2. A StarCore device is specified with:

# B4860

# 3. A non-StarCore device is specified with:

# Generic <Value_1> <Value_2> <Value_3>

# Value_1 is the length in bits of the JTAG instruction register.

# Value_2 is the length in bits of the JTAG bypass register.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

261

Debugging Multi-Core Projects

# Value_3 is the hex value of the JTAG bypass instruction.

# Hex values are prefixed with 0x.

# 4. Each device is specified on a new line.

# 5. Device specification is case sensitive, and a Generic device

# cannot be specified without all three values.

#

#An example configuration is shown below:

B4860

Generic 4 1 Oxf

You can also include entries for other StarCore, non-StarCore devices connected to the

JTAG chain by adding the following lines of code to your JTAG initialization file:

Generic

instruct_reg_len

data_reg_bypass_len

JTAG_bypass_instruct

The table below shows the variable definitions that you must specify for a generic device.

Table 9-1. Syntax Variables to Specify Generic Device on JTAG Chain

instruct_reg_len data_reg_bypass_len

JTAG_bypass_instruct

Variable Description

Length (in bits) of the JTAG instruction register.

Length (in bits) of the JTAG bypass register.

Value of the JTAG bypass instruction (in hexadecimal).

9.2 Debugging Multi-Core Projects

This section explains how to set launch configurations and how to debug multiple cores in a multi-core project.

The CodeWarrior debugger provides the facility to debug multiple StarCore processors using a single debug environment. The run control operations can be operated independently or synchronously. A common debug kernel facilitates multi-core, run control debug operations for examining and debugging the interaction of the software running on the different cores on the system.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

262 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 9 Multi-Core Debugging

NOTE

This procedure assumes that you have already created a multicore project, named board_project

.

To debug multiple cores connected to a JTAG chain, perform the steps given in the following sections:

•

Setting Launch Configurations

•

Debugging Multiple Cores

9.2.1 Setting Launch Configurations

Setting a launch configuration allows you to specify all core-specific initializations.

To set up the launch configurations, follow these steps:

1. Connect to your JTAG chain.

NOTE

The JTAG chain includes multiple boards or multiple processors on the same or multiple boards.

2. Create a JTAG initialization file that describes the items on the JTAG chain. For more information on how to create a JTAG initialization file, see

Creating a JTAG

Initialization File

.

3. Open the CodeWarrior project you want to debug.

4. Switch to the Debug perspective.

5. Select Run > Debug Configurations.

The Debug Configurations dialog box appears (shown in the figure below) with a list of debug configurations that apply to the current application.

6. Expand the CodeWarrior tree control.

7. From the expanded list, select the debug configuration for which you want to modify the debugger settings. For example, board_project_Debug_B4860_Download_Core00

.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

263

Debugging Multi-Core Projects

Figure 9-1. Debug Configurations Dialog Box

8. On the Main tab, select a connection from the Connection drop-down list.

9. Select a core from the Target list.

10. Click Edit next to the Connection drop-down list.

The Properties for <connection> dialog box appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

264 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 9 Multi-Core Debugging

Figure 9-2. Properties for <connection> Dialog Box

11. Select a target from the Target drop-down list.

12. Select the required TAP connection from the Connection type drop-down list. For example, Ethernet TAP.

13. On the Connection tab, specify the hostname/IP of the target board in the

Hostname/IP text box.

14. Enter the JTAG clock speed in the JTAG clock speed text box.

15. Specify the port number of the CCS server in the Server port number text box.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

265

Debugging Multi-Core Projects

Figure 9-3. Properties for <connection> Dialog Box - Connection Settings

16. Click Edit.

The Properties for <project> Target dialog box appears.

Figure 9-4. Debug Configurations - Properties for <target> Dialog Box

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

266 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 9 Multi-Core Debugging

17. Select a target from the Target type drop-down list.

18. Click Edit.

The Target Types dialog box appears.

19. Click Import.

The Import Target Type dialog box appears.

20. Select the JTAG initialization file that describes the items on the JTAG chain.

21. Click Open.

The items on the JTAG chain described in the file appear in the Target Types dialog box.

Figure 9-5. Target Types Dialog Box

22. Click OK.

The selected JTAG configuration file appears on the Initialization tab.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

267

Debugging Multi-Core Projects

Figure 9-6. Initialization Tab - JTAG Configuration

23. Click OK.

24. Click OK.

25. Click the Debugger tab in the Debug Configurations dialog box.

The Debugger tab page appears.

26. Ensure that the Stop on startup at checkbox is selected and main

is specified in the

User specified text box.

27. Click Apply to save the changes.

You have successfully configured a debug configuration.

28. Similarly, configure remaining debug configurations.

NOTE

To successfully debug multiple cores, the connection settings must be identical for all debug configurations.

9.2.2 Debugging Multiple Cores

The CodeWarrior debugger enables system developers to simultaneously develop and debug applications on a system with multiple processors, within the same debug environment.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

268 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 9 Multi-Core Debugging

NOTE

Ensure that you have attached a debug probe to the target board and to the computer hosting the CodeWarrior IDE before performing the steps listed in this section.

To debug multiple cores, follow these steps:

1. Select a multi-core project in the CodeWarrior Projects view.

2. Select Run > Debug.

The debugger downloads core 0 and switches to the Debug perspective. The debugger halts execution at the first statement of main()

. The Debug view displays all the threads associated with the core.

Figure 9-7. Multi-Core Debugging - Debug Core 0

3. Download all other cores associated with the project.

4. Select a thread from core 0 in the Debug view.

All the views in the Debug perspective will be updated to display the debug session for the selected core. The figure below displays the debug session for a selected thread in core 0.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

269

Debugging Multi-Core Projects

Figure 9-8. Viewing Debug Information for Core 0

5. Select and expand the General Purpose Registers group.

6. Select Run > Step Over.

The following actions occur:

• Debugger executes the current statement and halts at the next statement.

• The program counter (PC) indicator moves to the next executable source line in the Source view.

• In the Debug view, the status of the program changes to (

Suspended

).

• Modified register values are highlighted in yellow.

7. Select Window > New Window.

Another instance of the Debug perspective opens in a new window. The figure below displays multiple instances of an active debug session.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

270 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 9 Multi-Core Debugging

Figure 9-9. Viewing Multiple Instances of Active Debug Session

8. Select a thread from core 1 in the Debug view of the newly opened Debug -

<project> window.

All the views in the Debug perspective will be updated to display the debug session for the selected core.

9. Select and expand the Extended Simulator Registers group.

10. Select Run > Step Over.

The following actions occur:

• Debugger executes the current statement and halts at the next statement.

• The program counter (PC) indicator moves to the next executable source line in the Source view.

11. Issue several more Step Over commands and watch the register values change.

12. Select main()

thread from core 0 again.

Notice that the register values remain unchanged. This is because the CodeWarrior debugger controls each core's execution individually.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

271

Multi-Core Debugging Commands

13.

With core 0 still selected, click the Step Over button several times until you reach the printf()

statement.

Debugger executes the current statement, the following statements, and halts at the printf()

statement.

14. Switch to the other debug window.

15. Select the main()

thread for core 1 by clicking it. Notice that the program counter icon in the Source view did not move. The debugger controls the execution of each core individually.

16.

In the Debug view, click the Resume button.

Core 1 enters an infinite loop. The status of the program changes to (

Running

).

17.

In the Debug view, click the main()

thread for core 0 and click the Resume button.

Core 0 enters an infinite loop and core 1 continues to execute in its loop.

18.

Select main()

thread from core 1 and click the Suspend button.

The debugger halts core 1 at the current statement and the status of the program changes to (

Halted

). Core 0 continues to execute.

19. Select Run > Multicore Terminate.

The debugger terminates the active debug session. The threads associated with each core in the Debug view disappear.

9.3 Multi-Core Debugging Commands

This section describes the multi-core commands available in the Run menu of

CodeWarrior IDE and in the Debugger Shell.

If you are debugging a multi-core project, you can use single and multi-core debugging commands to debug parts of each core project.

•

Multi-Core Commands in CodeWarrior IDE

•

Multi-Core Commands in Debugger Shell

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

272 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

9.3.1 Multi-Core Commands in CodeWarrior IDE

Chapter 9 Multi-Core Debugging

This section describes the multi-core commands in the CodeWarrior IDE.

When you start a multi-core debug session, multi-core commands are enabled on the

CodeWarrior IDE Run menu. These commands, when issued, affect all cores simultaneously. The table below describes each menu choice. For detailed information on these commands, see CodeWarrior Development Studio Common Features Guide.

Command

Multicore Resume

Table 9-2. Multi-Core Debugging Commands

Icon Description

Starts all cores of a multi-core system running simultaneously.

Multicore Suspend

Multicore Restart

Multicore Terminate

Multicore Groups

Stops execution of all cores of a multi-core system simultaneously.

Restarts all the debug sessions for all cores of a multi-core system simultaneously.

Kills all the debug sessions for all cores of a multi-core system simultaneously.

Use All Cores: If the selected debug context is a multi-core system, then all cores are used for multi-core operations.

Disable Halt Groups: Disables breakpoint halt groups. For more information on halt groups, see "Multicore Breakpoint Halt Groups" in

CodeWarrior Development Studio Common Features Guide.

Limit new breakpoints to current group: If selected, all new breakpoints set during a debug session are reproduced only on cores belonging to the group of the core on which the breakpoint is set.

Edit Target Types: Opens Target Types dialog box that lets you add and remove system types.

Edit Multicore Groups: Opens the Multicore Groups dialog box to create multi-core groups. You can also use this option to modify the existing multi-core groups.

NOTE

For more information about creating/modifying multi-core groups, or editing target type, see "Multicore Groups" in

CodeWarrior Development Studio Common Features Guide

.

To use the multi-core commands from the Debug perspective, follow these steps:

1. Start a debugging session by selecting the appropriately configured launch configuration.

2. If necessary, expand the desired core's list of active threads by clicking on the tree control in the Debug view.

3. Click the thread you want to use with multi-core operations.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

273

Multi-Core Debugging Commands

4. From the Run menu, specify the multi-core operation to perform on the thread.

NOTE

The keyboard shortcut for the Multicore Resume operation is Alt+Shift+F8.

9.3.2 Multi-Core Commands in Debugger Shell

This section describes the multi-core commands in debugger shell.

In addition to the multicore-specific toolbar buttons and menu commands available in the

Debug view, the Debugger Shell has multi-core specific commands that can control the operation of one or more processor cores at the same time. Like the menu commands, the multi-core debugger shell commands allow you to select, start, and stop a specific core.

You can also restart or kill sessions executing on a particular core. The table below lists and defines the affect of each multi-core debugging command.

Command

mc::config mc::go mc::group mc::c mc::g

Table 9-3. Multi-Core Debugging Commands

mc::gr

Shortcut Description

List or edit multicore group options.

Syntax

mc::config

Resume multiple cores

Syntax

mc::go

Examples

mc::go

Resumes the selected cores associated with the current thread context.

Display or edit multicore groups

Syntax

group group new <type-name> [<name>] group rename

<name>|<group-index> <new-name>group remove <name>|

<group-index> ... group removeall group enable|disable

<index> ...|all

Examples

mc::group

Shows the defined groups, including indices for use in the mc::group rename|enable|remove set of commands.

mc::group new 8572

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

274 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

mc::kill

Command

mc::reset mc::restart mc::stop mc::type

Chapter 9 Multi-Core Debugging

Table 9-3. Multi-Core Debugging Commands (continued)

mc::kill mc::t

Shortcut

mc::reset mc::restart mc::stop

Description

Creates a new group for system type 8572. The group name will be based on the system name and will be unique. The enablement of the group elements will be all non-cores enabled, all cores disabled.

mc::group rename 0 "My Group Name"

Renames the group at index 0 to "My Group Name".

mc::group enable 0 0.0

Enables the group at index 0 and the element at index 0.0 of the mc::group command.

mc::group remove "My Group Name"

Removes the group named "My Group Name".

mc::group removeall

Removes all groups.

Terminates the debug session for selected cores associated with the current thread context.

Syntax

mc::kill

Examples

mc::kill

Terminates multiple cores.

Resets multiple cores.

Syntax

mc::reset

Restarts the debug session for selected cores associated with the current thread context.

Syntax

mc::restart

Examples

mc::restart

Restarts multiple cores.

Stops the selected cores associated with the current thread context.

Syntax

mc::stop

Examples

mc::stop

Suspends multiple cores.

Shows the system types available for multicore debugging as well as type indices for use by the mc::type remove and mc::group new commands.

Syntax

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

275

Multi-Core Debugging Commands

Table 9-3. Multi-Core Debugging Commands

Command Shortcut Description

type type import <filename> type remove <filename>|

<type-index> ... type removeall

Examples

mc::type

Display or edit system types.

mc::type import 8572_jtag.txt

Creates a new type from the JTAG configuration file.

mc::type remove 8572_jtag.txt

Removes the type imported from the specified file.

mc::type removeall

Removes all imported types.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

276 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10

Working with Hardware Tools

This chapter explains how to use the CodeWarrior hardware tools. Use these tools for board bring-up, test, and analysis.

In this chapter:

•

Flash programmer

•

Flash File to Target

•

Hardware diagnostics

•

Import/Export/Fill memory

10.1 Flash programmer

Flash programmer is a CodeWarrior plug-in that lets you program the flash memory of the supported target boards from within the IDE.

The flash programmer can program the flash memory of the target board with code from a CodeWarrior IDE project or a file. You can perform the following actions on a flash device using the flash programmer:

•

Erase/Blank check actions

•

Program/Verify actions

•

Checksum actions

•

Diagnostics actions

•

Dump Flash actions

•

Protect/Unprotect actions

The flash programmer runs as a target task in the Eclipse IDE. To program the flash memory on a target board, you need to perform the following tasks:

•

Create a flash programmer target task

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

277

Flash programmer

•

Configure flash programmer target task

•

Execute flash programmer target task

NOTE

Click the Save button or press Ctrl+S to save task settings.

10.1.1 Create a flash programmer target task

You can create a flash programmer task using the Create New Target Task wizard.

1. Choose Window > Show View > Other from the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar.

The Show View dialog appears.

Figure 10-1. Show View dialog

2. Expand the Debug group and select Target Tasks.

3. Click OK.

The Target Tasks view appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

278 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

Figure 10-2. Target Tasks view

4. Click the Create a new Target Task button in the Target Tasks view toolbar.

The Create New Target Task wizard appears.

Figure 10-3. Create New Target Task window

5. In the Task Name textbox, enter a name for the new flash programming target task.

6. Choose a launch configuration from the Run Configuration pop-up menu.

• Choose Active Debug Context when flash programmer is used over an active debug session.

• Choose a project-specific debug context when flash programmer is used without an active debug session.

7. Choose Flash Programmer from the Task Type pop-up menu.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

279

Flash programmer

8. Click Finish.

The target task is created and the Flash Programmer Task editor window appears.

You use this window to configure the flash programmer target task.

• Flash Devices - Lists the devices added in the current task.

• Target RAM - Lets you specify the settings for Target RAM.

• Flash Program Actions - Displays the programmer actions to be performed on the flash devices.

10.1.2 Configure flash programmer target task

You can add flash devices, specify Target RAM settings, and add flash program actions to a flash programmer task to configure it.

This topic contains the following sub-topics:

•

Add flash device

•

Specify target RAM settings

•

Add flash programmer actions

10.1.2.1 Add flash device

To add a flash device to the Flash Devices table:

1. Click the Add Device button.

The Add Device dialog appears.

2. Select a flash device from the device list.

3. Click the Add Device button.

The flash device is added to the Flash Devices table in the Flash Programmer Task editor window.

NOTE

You can select multiple flash devices to add to the Flash

Devices table. To select multiple devices, hold down the

Control key while selecting the devices.

4. Click Done.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

280 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

The Add Device dialog closes and the flash device appears in the Flash Devices table in the Flash Programmer Task editor window.

NOTE

For NOR flashes, the base address indicates the location where the flash is mapped in the memory. For SPI and

NAND flashes, the base address is usually

0x0

.

10.1.2.2 Specify target RAM settings

The Target RAM is used by Flash Programmer to download its algorithms.

NOTE

The Target RAM memory area is not restored by flash programmer. If you are using flash programmer with Active

Debug Context, it will impact your debug session.

The Target RAM(

Add flash device

) group contains fields to specify settings for the

Target RAM.

• Address textbox: Use it to specify the address from the target memory. The Address textbox should contain the first address from target memory used by the flash algorithm running on a target board.

• Size textbox: Use it to specify the size of the target memory. The flash programmer does not modify any memory location other than the target memory buffer and the flash memory.

• Verify Target Memory Writes checkbox: Select this checkbox to verify all write operations to the hardware RAM during flash programming.

10.1.2.3 Add flash programmer actions

In the Flash Programmer Actions group in the Flash Programmer Task editor window

(

Create a flash programmer target task ), you can add following actions on the flash

device.

•

Erase/Blank check actions

•

Program/Verify actions

•

Checksum actions

•

Diagnostics actions

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

281

Flash programmer

•

Dump Flash actions

•

Protect/Unprotect actions

The Flash Programmer Actions group contains the following UI controls to work with flash programmer actions:

• Add Action pop-up menu

• Erase/Blank Check Action: Allows you to add erase or blank check actions for a flash device.

• Program/Verify Action: Allows you to add program or verify flash actions for a flash device.

• Checksum Action: Allows you to add checksum actions for a flash device.

• Diagnostics Action: Lets you add a diagnostics action.

• Dump Flash Action: Lets you add a dump flash action.

• Protect/Unprotect Action: Lets you add protect or unprotect action.

• Secure/Unsecure Action: Lets you add secure or unsecure action.

• Duplicate Action button: Allows you to duplicate a flash program action in the

Flash Programmer Actions table.

• Remove Action button: Allows you to remove a flash program action from the Flash

Programmer Actions table.

• Move Upbutton: Allows you to move up the selected flash action in the Flash

Programmer Actions table.

• Move Down button: Allows you to move down the selected flash action in the Flash

Programmer Actions table.

NOTE

Actions can also be enabled or disabled using the Enabled column. The Description column contains the default description for the flash programmer actions. You can also edit the default description.

10.1.2.3.1 Erase/Blank check actions

The Erase action erases sectors from the flash device.

You can also use the erase action to erase the entire flash memory without selecting sectors. The blank check action verifies if the specified areas have been erased from the flash device.

NOTE

Flash Programmer will not erase a bad sector in the NAND flash. After the erase action a list of bad sectors is reported (if any).

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

282 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

To add an erase/blank check action:

1. Choose Erase/Blank Check Action from the Add Action pop-up menu.

The Add Erase/Blank Check Action dialog appears.

2. Select a sector from the Sectors table and click the Add Erase Action button to add an erase operation on the selected sector.

NOTE

Press the Control or the Shift key for selecting multiple sectors from the Sectors table.

3. Click the Add Blank Check button to add a blank check operation on the selected sector.

4. Select the Erase All Sectors Using Chip Erase Command checkbox to erase the entire flash memory.

NOTE

After selecting the Erase All Sectors Using Chip Erase

Command checkbox, you need to add either erase or blank check action to erase all sectors.

5. Click Done.

The Add Erase/Blank Check Action dialog closes and the added erase/blank check actions appear in the Flash Programmer Actions table in the Flash Programmer

Task editor window.

10.1.2.3.2 Program/Verify actions

The Program action allows you to program the flash device and the verify action verifies the programmed flash device.

NOTE

The program action will abort and fail if it is performed in a bad block for NAND flashes.

To add a program/verify action:

1. Choose Program/Verify Action from the Add Action pop-up menu.

The Add Program/Verify Action dialog appears.

2. Select the file to be written to the flash device.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

283

Flash programmer

3. Select the Use File from Launch Configuration checkbox to use the file from the launch (run) configuration associated with the task.

4. Specify the file name in the File textbox. You can use Workspace, File System, or

Variables buttons to select the desired file.

5. Choose a file type from the File Type pop-up menu. You can select any one of the following file types:

• Auto - Detects the file type automatically.

• Elf - Specifies executable in ELF format.

• Srec - Specifies files in Motorola S-record format.

• Binary - Specifies binary files.

6. Select the Erase sectors before program checkbox to erase sectors before program.

7. [Optional] Select the Verify after program checkbox to verify after the program.

NOTE

The Verify after program checkbox is available only with the processors supporting it.

8. Select the Restricted To Address in this Range checkbox to specify a memory range. The write action is permitted only in the specified address range. In the Start textbox, specify the start address of the memory range sector and in the End textbox, specify the end address of the memory range.

9. Select the Apply Address Offset checkbox and set the memory address in the

Address textbox. Value is added to the start address of the file to be programmed or verified.

10. Click the Add Program Action button to add a program action on the flash device.

11. Click the Add Verify Action button to add a verify action on the flash device.

12. Click Done.

The Add Program/Verify Action dialog closes and the added program/verify actions appear in the Flash Programmer Actions table in the Flash Programmer

Task editor window.

10.1.2.3.3 Checksum actions

The checksum can be computed over host file, target file, memory range or entire flash memory.

To add a checksum action:

1. Choose Checksum Action from the Add Action pop-up menu.

The Add Checksum Action dialog appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

284 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

2. Select the file for checksum action.

3. Select the Use File from Launch Configuration checkbox to use the file from the launch (run) configuration associated with the task.

4. Specify the filename in the File textbox. You can use the Workspace, File System, or Variables buttons to select the desired file.

5. Choose the file type from the File Type pop-up menu.

6. Select an option from the Compute Checksum Over options. The checksum can be computed over the host file, the target file, the memory range, or the entire flash memory.

7. Specify the memory range in the Restricted To Addresses in this Range group. The checksum action is permitted only in the specified address range. In the Start textbox, specify the start address of the memory range sector and in the End textbox, specify the end address of the memory range.

8. Select the Apply Address Offset checkbox and set the memory address in the

Address textbox. Value is added to the start address of the file to be programmed or verified.

9. Click the Add Checksum Action button.

10. Click Done.

The Add Checksum Action dialog closes and the added checksum actions appear in the Flash Programmer Actions table in the Flash Programmer Task editor window.

10.1.2.3.4 Diagnostics actions

The diagnostics action generates the diagnostic information for a selected flash device.

NOTE

Flash Programmer will report bad blocks, if they are present in the NAND flash.

To add a diagnostics action:

1. Choose Diagnostics from the Add Action pop-up menu.

The Add Diagnostics Action dialog appears.

2. Select a device to perform the diagnostics action.

3. Click the Add Diagnostics Action button to add diagnostic action on the selected flash device.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

285

Flash programmer

NOTE

Select the Perform Full Diagnostics checkbox to perform full diagnostics on a flash device.

4. Click Done.

The Add Diagnostics Action dialog closes and the added diagnostics action appears in the Flash Programmer Actions table in the Flash Programmer Task editor window.

10.1.2.3.5 Dump Flash actions

The dump flash action allows you to dump selected sectors of a flash device or the entire flash device.

To add a dump flash action:

1. Choose Dump Flash Action from the Add Action pop-up menu.

The Add Dump Flash Action dialog appears.

2. Specify the file name in the File textbox. The flash is dumped in this selected file.

3. Choose the file type from the File Type pop-up menu. You can choose any one of the following file types:

• Srec: Saves files in Motorola S-record format.

• Binary: Saves files in binary file format.

4. Specify the memory range for which you want to add dump flash action.

• Enter the start address of the range in the Start textbox.

• Enter the end address of the range in the End textbox.

5. Click the Add Dump Flash Action button to add a dump flash action.

6. Click Done.

The Add Dump Flash Action dialog closes and the added dump flash action appear in the Flash Programmer Actions table in the Flash Programmer Task editor window.

10.1.2.3.6 Protect/Unprotect actions

The protect/unprotect actions allow you to change the protection of a sector in the flash device.

To add a protect/unprotect action:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

286 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

1. Choose the Protect/Unprotect Action from the Add Action pop-up menu.

The Add Protect/Unprotect Action dialog appears.

2. Select a sector from the Sectors table and click the Add Protect Action button to add a protect operation on the selected sector.

NOTE

Press the Control or Shift key for selecting multiple sectors from the Sectors table.

3. Click the Add Unprotect Action button to add an unprotect action on the selected sector.

4. Select the All Device checkbox to add action on full device.

5. Click Done.

The Add Protect/Unprotect Action dialog closes and the added protect or unprotect actions appear in the Flash Programmer Actions table in the Flash Programmer

Task editor window.

10.1.2.3.7 Duplicate action

You can duplicate a flash programmer action from the Flash Programmer Actions table.

1. Select the action in the Flash Programmer Actions table.

2. Click the Duplicate Action button.

The selected action is copied in the Flash Programmer Action table.

10.1.2.3.8 Remove action

You can remove a flash programmer action from the Flash Programmer Actions table.

1. Select the action in the Flash Programmer Actions table.

2. Click the Remove Action button.

The selected action is removed from the Flash Programmer Action table.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

287

Flash programmer

10.1.3 Execute flash programmer target task

You can execute the flash programmer tasks using the Target Tasks view.

To execute the configured flash programmer target task, select a target task and click the

Execute button in the Target Tasks view toolbar. Alternatively, right-click on a target task and choose Execute from the shortcut menu.

Figure 10-4. Execute target task

NOTE

You can use predefined target tasks for supported boards. To load a predefined target task, right-click in the Target Tasks view and choose Import Target Task from the shortcut menu.

To save your custom tasks, right-click in the Target Tasks view and then choose Export Target Task from the shortcut menu.

You can check the results of flash batch actions in the Console view. The green color indicates the success and the red color indicates the failure of the task.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

288 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

Figure 10-5. Console view

10.1.4 Flash Programmer Use Case

This topic lists the following use case:

•

Using Flash Programmer to Write uboot Image to Target

10.1.4.1 Using Flash Programmer to Write uboot Image to Target

You need to perform the following actions to write uboot images using CodeWarrior for

StarCore 3900FP DSP flash programmer:

NOTE

You need

B4860QDS_NOR_FLASH.xml

for RCW writing at step 5, and the offset at step 7 is

0xE8000000

.

1. Edit the launch configuration.

NOTE

CodeWarrior for StarCore 3900FP DSP flash programmer supports both SRAM and DDR init

files. For this tutorial, you must change the default init

file with the

SRAM init

for core 0.

To edit the launch config, perform these steps:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

289

Flash programmer

a. Select Run > Debug Configurations to open the Debug configurations dialog box.

b. Select Core 0 launch config c. From the Target settings group, click Edit.

The Properties for <connection> dialog box appears.

d. From the Target option, click Edit.

The Properties for <connection> Target dialog box appears.

e. Check the Target Initialize checkbox for core 0, then click in the Initialize

target script column.

f. Click the browse button (...) to open the Target Initialization File dialog box.

g. Click File System and select B4860_QDS_SRAM_Init.tcl file from SC

\StarCore_Support\Initialization_Files\RegisterConfigFiles\B4860_QDS

folder.

Figure 10-6. Target Initialization File Dialog Box

2. Start a debugging session. Wait until the control stops at address 0x00000000.

3. Press Ctrl + 3 and write

Commander

to open the Commander view.

4. From Commander view, click Flash programmer.

5. From the Flash Configuration File group click Browse and select

B4860QDS_NOR_FLASH.xml

to write u-boot in NOR memory, otherwise use the NAND file.

6. Click Browse to specify for your u-boot image file in the File textbox.

7. Write your u-boot offset in Offset textbox. You may use

0xeff80000

.

8. You can save the file by selecting Save as Target Task option, otherwise, clear the checkbox.

9. Click Erase and Program.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

290 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

Figure 10-7. Flash File To Target Dialog Box

The flash programmer writes the uboot image file to the target.

NOTE

If you cannot connect to the board anymore, you can write the new RCW by following these steps:

1. Note and save the current configuration of SW2 and SW3.

2. Modify the switches to boot from hard-coded RCW: a. SW3 -> 0100_0011 b. SW2 -> 0111_0100 c. SW2: SRC8 (b1) set to 0 and RES_REQ(b5) set to 0.

3. Connect to the board and write the new RCW using the instructions listed above.

4. Set the switches back to the saved configuration.

10.2 Flash File to Target

You can use the Flash File to Target feature to perform flash operations such as erasing a flash device or programming a file.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

291

Flash File to Target

You do not need any project for using Flash File to Target feature, only a valid Remote

System is required.

To open the Flash File to Target dialog, click the Flash Programmer button on the IDE toolbar.

• Connection pop-up menu- Lists all run configurations defined in Eclipse. If a connection to the target has already been made the control becomes inactive and contains the text Active Debug Configuration.

• Flash Configuration File pop-up menu - Lists predefined target tasks for the processor selected in the Launch Configuration and tasks added by user with the

Browse button. The items in this pop-up menu are updated based on the processor selected in the launch configuration. For more information on launch configurations, see product's Targeting Manual.

• Unprotect flash memory before erase checkbox - Select to unprotect flash memory before erasing the flash device. This feature allows you to unprotect the flash memory from Flash File To Target dialog.

• File to Flash group - Allows selecting the file to be programmed on the flash device and the location.

• File textbox - Used for specifying the filename. You can use the Workspace,

File System, or Variables buttons to select the desired file.

• Offset:0x textbox - Used for specifying offset location for a file. If no offset is specified the default value of zero is used. The offset is always added to the start address of the file. If the file does not contain address information then zero is considered as start address.

• Save as Target Task - Select to enable Task Name textbox.

• Task Name textbox - Lets you to save the specified settings as a Flash target task. Use the testbox to specify the name of the target task.

• Erase Whole Device button - Erases the flash device. In case you have multiple flash blocks on the device, all blocks are erased. If you want to selectively erase or program blocks, use the

Flash programmer

feature.

• Erase and Program button - Erases the sectors that are occupied with data and then programs the file. If the flash device can not be accessed at sector level then the flash device is completely erased.

This feature helps you perform these basic flash operations:

•

Erasing flash device

•

Programming a file

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

292 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

10.2.1 Erasing flash device

To erase a flash device, follow these steps:

1. Click the Flash Programmer button on the IDE toolbar.

The Flash File to Target dialog appears.

2. Choose a connection from the Connection pop-up menu.

NOTE

If a connection is already established with the target, this control is disabled.

The Flash Configuration File pop-up menu is updated with the supported configurations for the processor from the launch configuration.

3. Choose a flash configuration from the Flash Configuration File pop-up menu.

4. Select the Unprotect flash memory before erase checkbox to unprotect flash memory before erasing the flash device.

5. Click the Erase Whole Device button.

10.2.2 Programming a file

1. Click the Flash Programmer button on the IDE toolbar.

The Flash File to Target dialog appears.

2. Choose a connection from the Connection pop-up menu.

NOTE

If a connection is already established with the target, this control is disabled.

The Flash Configuration File pop-up menu is updated with the supported configurations for the processor from the launch configuration.

3. Choose a flash configuration from the Flash Configuration File pop-up menu.

4. Select the Unprotect flash memory before erase checkbox to unprotect flash memory before erasing the flash device.

5. Type the file name in the File textbox. You can use the Workspace, File System, or

Variables buttons to select the desired file.

6. Type the offset location in the Offset textbox.

7. Click the Erase and Program button.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

293

Hardware diagnostics

10.3 Hardware diagnostics

The Hardware Diagnostics utility lets you run a series of diagnostic tests that determine if the basic hardware is functional.

These tests include:

• Memory read/write: This test only makes a read or write access to the memory to read or write a byte, word (2 bytes) and long word (4 bytes) to or from the memory.

For this task, the user needs to set the options in the Memory Access group.

• Scope loop: This test makes read and write accesses to memory in a loop at the target address. The time between accesses is given by the loop speed settings. The loop can only be stopped by the user, which cancels the test. For this type of test, the user needs to set the memory access settings and the loop speed.

• Memory tests: This test requires the user to set the access size and target address from the access settings group and the settings present in the Memory Tests group.

This topic contains the following sub-topics:

•

Creating hardware diagnostics task

•

Working with Hardware Diagnostic Action editor

•

Memory test use cases

10.3.1 Creating hardware diagnostics task

You can create a hardware diagnostic task using the Create New Target Task wizard.

To create a task for hardware diagnostics:

1. Choose Window > Show View > Other from the IDE menu bar.

The Show View dialog appears.

2. Expand the Debug group and select Target Tasks.

3. Click OK.

4. Click the Create a new Target Task button on the Target Tasks view toolbar.

Alternatively, right-click in the Target Tasks view and choose New Task from the shortcut menu.

The Create a New Target Task wizard appears.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

294 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

5. Type name for the new task in the Task Name textbox.

6. Choose a launch configuration from the Run Configuration pop-up menu.

NOTE

If the task does not successfully launch the configuration that you specify, the Execute button on the Target Tasks view toolbar stays unavailable.

7. Choose Hardware Diagnostic from the Task Type pop-up menu.

8. Click Finish.

A new hardware diagnostic task is created in the Target Tasks view.

NOTE

You can perform various actions on a hardware diagnostic task, such as renaming, deleting, or executing the task, using the shortcut menu that appears on right-clicking the task in the Target tasks view.

10.3.2 Working with Hardware Diagnostic Action editor

The Hardware Diagnostic Action editor is used to configure a hardware diagnostic task.

To open the Hardware Diagnostic Action editor for a particular task, double-click the task in the Target Tasks view.

The following figure shows the Hardware Diagnostics Action editor.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

295

Hardware diagnostics

Figure 10-8. Hardware Diagnostics Action editor

The Hardware Diagnostics Action editor window includes the following groups:

•

Action Type

•

Memory Access

•

Loop Speed

•

Memory Tests

10.3.2.1 Action Type

The Action Type group in the Hardware Diagnostics Action editor window is used for selecting the action type.

You can choose any one of the following actions:

• Memory read/write - Enables the options in the Memory Access group.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

296 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

• Scope loop - Enables the options in the Memory Access and the Loop Speed groups.

• Memory test - Enables the access size and target address from the access settings group and the settings present in the Memory Tests group.

10.3.2.2 Memory Access

The Memory Access pane configures diagnostic tests for performing memory reads and writes over the remote connection interface.

The table below lists and describes the items in the pane.

Item

Read

Write

1 unit

2 units

4 units

Target Address

Value

Verify Memory Writes

Table 10-1. Memory Access Pane Items

Description

Select to have the hardware diagnostic tools perform read tests.

Select to have the hardware diagnostic tools perform write tests.

Select to have the hardware diagnostic tools perform one memory unit access size operations.

Select to have the hardware diagnostic tools perform two memory units access size operations.

Select to have the hardware diagnostic tools perform four memory units access size operations.

Specify the address of an area in RAM that the hardware diagnostic tools should analyze. The tools must be able to access this starting address through the remote connection (after the hardware initializes).

Specify the value that the hardware diagnostic tools write during testing. Select the

Write option to enable this textbox.

Select the checkbox to verify success of each data write to the memory.

10.3.2.3 Loop Speed

The Loop Speed pane configures diagnostic tests for performing repeated memory reads and writes over the remote connection interface.

The tests repeat until you stop them. By performing repeated read and write operations, you can use a scope analyzer or logic analyzer to debug the hardware device. After the first 1000 operations, the Status shows the estimated time between operations.

NOTE

For all values of Speed, the time between operations depends heavily on the processing speed of the host computer.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

297

Hardware diagnostics

For Read operations, the Scope Loop test has an additional feature. During the first read operation, the hardware diagnostic tools store the value read from the hardware. For all successive read operations, the hardware diagnostic tools compare the read value to the stored value from the first read operation. If the Scope Loop test determines that the value read from the hardware is not stable, the diagnostic tools report the number of times that the read value differs from the first read value. Following table lists and describes the items in Loop Speed pane.

Set Loop Speed

Item

Table 10-2. Loop Speed Pane Items

Description

Enter a numeric value between 0 to 1000 in the textbox to adjust the speed. You can also move the slider to adjust the speed at which the hardware diagnostic tools repeat successive read and write operations. Lower speeds increase the delay between successive operations. Higher speeds decrease the delay between successive operations.

10.3.2.4 Memory Tests

The Memory Tests pane lets you perform three hardware tests, Walking Ones, Bus

Noise, and Address.

You can specify any combination of tests and number of passes to perform. For each pass, the hardware diagnostic tools performs the tests in turn, until all passes are complete. The tools compare memory test failures and display them in a log window after all passes are complete. Errors resulting from memory test failures do not stop the testing process; however, fatal errors immediately stop the testing process.

The following table explains the items in the Memory Tests pane.

Walking 1's

Address

Bus Noise

Item

Test Area Size

Number of Passes

Table 10-3. Memory Tests pane items

Explanation

Select the checkbox to have the hardware diagnostic tools perform the Walking Ones

test.

Deselect to have the diagnostic tools skip the Walking Ones

test.

Select to have the hardware diagnostic tools perform the

Address

test. Deselect to have the

diagnostic tools skip the Address test.

Select to have the hardware diagnostic tools perform the

Bus noise

test. Deselect to have the

diagnostic tools skip the Bus noise test.

Specify the size of memory to be tested. This setting along with Target Address defines the memory range being tested.

Enter the number of times that you want to repeat the specified tests.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

298 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Item

Use Target CPU

Download Algorithm to

Address

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

Table 10-3. Memory Tests pane items (continued)

Explanation

Select to have the hardware diagnostic tools download the test code to the hardware device.

Deselect to have the hardware diagnostic tools execute the test code through the remote connection interface. Execution performance improves greatly if you execute the test code on the hardware CPU, but requires that the hardware has enough stability and robustness to execute the test code.

NOTE: The option is not applicable for CodeWarrior StarCore devices.

Specify the address where the test driver is downloaded in case the Use target CPU is selected.

NOTE: The option is not applicable for CodeWarrior StarCore devices.

10.3.2.4.1 Walking Ones

This test detects these memory faults:

• Address Line: The board or chip address lines are shorting or stuck at 0 or 1. Either condition could result in errors when the hardware reads and writes to the memory location. Because this error occurs on an address line, the data may end up in the wrong location on a write operation, or the hardware may access the wrong data on a read operation.

• Data Line: The board or chip data lines are shorting or stuck at 0 or 1. Either condition could result in corrupted values as the hardware transfers data to or from memory.

• Retention: The contents of a memory location change over time. The effect is that the memory fails to retain its contents over time.

The Walking Ones test includes four sub-tests:

• Walking Ones: This subtest first initializes memory to all zeros. Then the subtest writes, reads, and verifies bits, with each bit successively set from the least significant bit ( LSB) to the most significant bit ( MSB). The subtest configures bits such that by the time it sets the MSB, all bits are set to a value of 1. This pattern repeats for each location within the memory range that you specify. For example, the values for a byte-based Walking Ones subtest occur in this order:

0x01, 0x03, 0x07, 0x0F, 0x1F, 0x3F, 0x7F, 0xFF

• Ones Retention: This subtest immediately follows the Walking Ones subtest. The

Walking Ones subtest should leave each memory location with all bits set to 1. The

Ones Retention subtest verifies that each location has all bits set to 1.

• Walking Zeros: This subtest first initializes memory to all ones. Then the subtest writes, reads, and verifies bits, with each bit successively set from the LSB to the

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

299

Hardware diagnostics

MSB. The subtest configures bits such that by the time it sets the MSB, all bits are set to a value of 0. This pattern repeats for each location within the memory range that you specify. For example, the values for a byte-based Walking Zeros subtest occur in this order:

0xFE, 0xFC, 0xF8, 0xF0, 0xE0, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x00

• Zeros Retention: This subtest immediately follows the Walking Zeros subtest. The

Walking Zeros subtest should leave each memory location with all bits set to 0. The

Zeros Retention subtest verifies that each location has all bits set to 0.

10.3.2.4.2 Address

This test detects memory aliasing. Memory aliasing exists when a physical memory block repeats one or more times in a logical memory space. Without knowing about this condition, you might conclude that there is much more physical memory than what actually exists.

The address test uses a simplistic technique to detect memory aliasing. The test writes sequentially increasing data values (starting at one and increasing by one) to each successive memory location. The maximum data value is a prime number and its specific value depends on the addressing mode so as to not overflow the memory location.

The test uses a prime number of elements to avoid coinciding with binary math boundaries:

• For byte mode, the maximum prime number is 28-5 or 251.

• For word mode, the maximum prime number is 216-15 or 65521.

• For long word mode, the maximum prime number is 232-5 or 4294967291.

If the test reaches the maximum value, the value rolls over to 1 and starts incrementing again. This sequential pattern repeats throughout the memory under test. Then the test reads back the resulting memory and verifies it against the written patterns. Any deviation from the written order could indicate a memory aliasing condition.

10.3.2.4.3 Bus noise

This test stresses the memory system by causing many bits to flip from one memory access to the next (both addresses and data values). Bus noise occurs when many bits change consecutively from one memory access to another. This condition can occur on both address and data lines.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

300 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

10.3.2.4.4 Address lines

To force bit flips in address lines, the test uses three approaches:

• Sequential- This approach works sequentially through all of the memory under test, from lowest address to highest address. This sequential approach results in an average number of bit flips from one access to the next.

• Full Range Converging- This approach works from the fringes of the memory range toward the middle of the memory range. Memory access proceeds in this pattern, where + number and - number indicate the next item location (the specific increment or decrement depends on byte, word, or long word address mode):

• the lowest address

• the highest address

• (the lowest address) + 1

• (the highest address) - 1

• (the lowest address) + 2

• (the highest address) - 2

• Maximum Invert Convergence- This approach uses calculated end point addresses to maximize the number of bits flipping from one access to the next. This approach involves identifying address end points such that the values have the maximum inverted bits relative to one another. Specifically, the test identifies the lowest address with all

0x5 values in the least significant nibbles and the highest address with all

0xA values in the least significant nibbles. After the test identifies these end points, memory access alternates between low address and high address, working towards the center of the memory under test. Accessing memory in this manner, the test achieves the maximum number of bits flips from one access to the next.

10.3.2.4.5 Data lines

To force bit flips in data lines, the test uses two sets of static data, a pseudo-random set and a fixed-pattern set. Each set contains 31 elements-a prime number. The test uses a prime number of elements to avoid coinciding with binary math boundaries. The sets are unique to each addressing mode so as to occupy the full range of bits.

• The test uses the pseudo-random data set to stress the data lines in a repeatable but pattern-less fashion.

• The test uses the fixed-pattern set to force significant numbers of data bits to flip from one access to the next.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

301

Hardware diagnostics

The sub-tests execute similarly in that each subtest iterates through static data, writing values to memory. The test combines the three address line approaches with the two data sets to produce six unique sub-tests:

• Sequential with Random Data

• Sequential with Fixed Pattern Data

• Full Range Converging with Random Data

• Full Range Converging with Fixed Pattern Data

• Maximum Invert Convergence with Random Data

• Maximum Invert Convergence with Fixed Pattern Data

10.3.3 Memory test use cases

The memory read /write and scope loop tests are host based tests. The host machine issues read and write action to the memory through the connection protocol. For example

CCS.

Memory tests are the complex tests that can be executed in two modes: Host based and

Target based depending upon the selection made for the Use Target CPU checkbox.

• Selected: Target Based

• Deselected: Host Based

The Host Based tests are slower than the Target Based tests.

10.3.3.1 Use Case 1: Execute host-based Scope Loop on target

You need to perform the following action to execute the host based scope loop on the target:

1. Select Scope loop in the Action Type.

2. Set Memory Access settings from the Memory Access section.

3. Set the speed used for the scope loop diagnostic from the Loop Speed section.

4. Save the settings.

5. Press Execute to execute the action.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

302 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

10.3.3.2 Use Case 2: Execute target-based Memory Tests on target

You need to perform the following action to execute the target based memory test on the target:

1. Select Memory Test in the Action Type.

2. Specify Target Address and Access Size settings from the Memory Access section.

3. Specify the following settings for Memory Tests section:

• Test Area Size: The tested memory region is computed from Target Address until Target Address + Test Area Size.

• Tests to Run: Select tests to run on the target.

• Number of passes: Specify number of times a test will be executed.

• Use Target CPU: set the Address to which the test driver (algorithm) is to be downloaded.

4. Save the settings.

5. Press Execute to execute the action.

10.4 Import/Export/Fill memory

The Import/Export/Fill Memory utility lets you export memory contents to a file and import data from a file into memory.

The utility also supports filling memory with a user provided data pattern.

10.4.1 Creating task for import/export/fill memory

You can use the Import/Export/Fill Memory utility to perform various tasks on memory.

The utility can be accessed from the Target Tasks view.

To open the Target Tasks view:

1. Choose Window > Show View > Other from the IDE menu bar.

The Show View dialog appears.

2. Expand the Debug group.

3. Select Target Tasks.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

303

Import/Export/Fill memory

4. Click OK.

The first time it opens, the Target Tasks view contains no tasks. You must create a task to use the Import/Export/Fill Memory utility.

To create a task:

1. Click the Create a new Target Task button on the toolbar of the Target Tasks view. Alternatively, right-click the left-hand list of tasks and choose New Task from the shortcut menu that appears.

The Create a New Target Task page appears.

Figure 10-9. Create New Target Task Window

2. In the Task Name textbox, enter a name for the new task.

3. Use the Run Configuration pop-up menu to specify the configuration that the task launches and uses to connect to the target.

NOTE

If the task does not successfully launch the configuration that you specify, the Execute button of the Target Tasks view toolbar stays unavailable.

4. Use the Task Type pop-up menu to specify Import/Export/Fill Memory.

5. Click Finish.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

304 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

The Import/Export/Fill Memory target task is created and it appears in the Import/

Export/Fill Memory Action editor.

Figure 10-10. Import/Export Memory Action editor

10.4.2 Importing data into memory

You can import the encoded data from a user specified file, decode it, and copy it into a user specified memory range.

Select the Import memory option from the Import/Export/Fill Memory Action editor to import data into memory.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

305

Import/Export/Fill memory

Figure 10-11. Import/Export Memory Action editor - Importing data into memory

The following table explains the import memory options.

Expression

Access Size

Select file

File Type

Table 10-4. Controls used for importing data into memory

Item

Memory space and address

Explanation

Enter the literal address and memory space on which the data transfer is performed.

The Literal address field allows only decimal and hexadecimal values.

Enter the memory address or expression at which the data transfer starts.

Denotes the number of addressable units of memory that the debugger accesses in transferring one data element. The default values shown are 1, 2, and 4 units. When target information is available, this list shall be filtered to display the access sizes that are supported by the target.

Enter the path to the file that contains the data to be imported. Click the

Workspace

button to select a file from the current project workspace. Click the

System button to select a file from the file system the standard File Open dialog. Click the

Variables

button to select a build variable.

Defines the format in which the imported data is encoded. By default, the following file types are supported:

• Signed decimal Text

• Unsigned decimal Text

• Motorola S-Record format

• Hex Text

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

306 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

Table 10-4. Controls used for importing data into memory (continued)

Item

Number of Elements

Verify Memory Writes

Explanation

• Annotated Hex Text

• Raw Binary

Enter the total number of elements to be transferred.

Select the checkbox to verify success of each data write to the memory.

10.4.3 Exporting memory to file

You can read data from a user specified memory range, encode it in a user specified format, and store this encoded data in a user specified output file.

Select the Export memory option from the Import/Export/Fill Memory Action editor to export memory to a file.

Figure 10-12. Exporting memory

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

307

Import/Export/Fill memory

The following table explains the export memory options.

Item

Memory space and address

Expression

Access Size

Select file

File Type

Table 10-5. Controls used for exporting data from memory into file

Number of Elements

Explanation

Enter the literal address and memory space on which the data transfer is performed.

The Literal address field allows only decimal and hexadecimal values.

Enter the memory address or expression at which the data transfer starts.

Denotes the number of addressable units of memory that the debugger accesses in transferring one data element. The default values shown are 1, 2, and 4 units. When target information is available, this list shall be filtered to display the access sizes that are supported by the target.

Enter the path of the file to write data. Click the

Workspace button to select a file from the current project workspace. Click the System button to select a file from the file system the standard

File Open dialog. Click the Variables button to select a build variable.

Defines the format in which encoded data is exported. By default, the following file types are supported:

• Signed decimal Text

• Unsigned decimal Text

• Motorola S-Record format

• Hex Text

• Annotated Hex Text

• Raw Binary

Enter the total number of elements to be transferred.

10.4.4 Fill memory

You can fill a user specified memory range with a user specified data pattern.

Select the Fill memory option from the Import/Export/Fill Memory Action editor window to fill memory.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

308 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 10 Working with Hardware Tools

Figure 10-13. Fill memory

The following table explains the fill memory options.

Table 10-6. Controls used for filling memory with data pattern

Item Explanation

Memory space and address Enter the literal address and memory space on which the fill operation is performed. The

Literal address field allows only decimal and hexadecimal values.

Expression

Access Size

Fill Pattern

Number of Elements

Verify Memory Writes

Enter the memory address or expression at which the fill operation starts.

Denotes the number of addressable units of memory that the debugger accesses in modifying one data element. The default values shown are 1, 2, and 4 units. When target information is available, this list shall be filtered to display the access sizes that are supported by the target.

Denotes the sequence of bytes, ordered from low to high memory mirrored in the target. The field accept only hexadecimal values. If the width of the pattern exceeds the access size, an error message.

Enter the total number of elements to be modified.

Select the checkbox to verify success of each data write to the memory.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

309

Import/Export/Fill memory

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

310 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 11

Exception Configurator

This chapter explains how to use the CodeWarrior Exception Configurator tool.

Use the Exceptions Configurator view to quickly determine the cause of an exception while executing an application.

To view the details of an exception using the Exceptions Configurator view, follow these steps:

1. Switch the IDE to the Debug perspective and start a debugging session.

2. Select Window > Show View > Other.

The Show View dialog box appears (

Figure 11-1

).

Figure 11-1. Show View Dialog Box

3. Expand the Debug group.

4. Select Exceptions Configurator.

5. Click OK.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

311

The Exception Configurator view appears (

Figure 11-2

).

NOTE

A blank window appears if no process is selected from the debug window.

Figure 11-2. Exceptions Configurator View

6. Check the Catch checkbox to select the exception.

Checking a parent node will automatically check all the children nodes. Clearing a parent node checkbox clears all the children nodes.

7. If you wish to change the current value of the VBA register, enter a hexadecimal value, a symbol name or a register name in the Vector Base Address text box.

NOTE

The debugger will try to evaluate the expression provided in the Vector Base Address text box. If the evaluation fails, specified text will be highlighted in red.

8. Click the Apply Changes button ( ) to save the changes.

The exceptions configurator is configured to capture the selected exceptions.

9. Retry the steps that caused the exception.

The debugger displays a complete stack crawl. The exceptions captured by the

Exceptions Configurator view are highlighted in red (

Figure 11-3 ).

Figure 11-3. Exceptions

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

312 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 11 Exception Configurator

NOTE

Exception settings defined for each debug configuration may not be identical. The state of the captured exceptions is persistent after restart.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

313

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

314 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 12

Memory Management Unit Configurator

This chapter explains how to use the CodeWarrior Memory Management Unit (MMU)

Configurator. The MMU allows different user tasks or programs (usually in the context of an RTOS) to use the same areas of memory. To use the MMU:

• You set up a mapping for data and instruction addresses

• Enable address translation

The mapping links the virtual addresses to the physical addresses. Translation occurs before software acts on the addresses.

The MMU Configurator simplifies peripheral-register initialization of the MMU registers. You can use the tool to generate code that you can insert into a program. The inserted code initializes an MMU configuration or writes to the registers on-the-fly. Also, you can use the MMU Configurator to examine the status of the current MMU configuration.

Use the MMU Configurator to:

• Configure MMU general control registers

• Configure MMU program memory-address-translation properties

• Configure MMU data memory-address-translation properties

• Display the current contents of each register

• Write the displayed contents from the MMU Configurator to the MMU registers

• Save to a file (in a format that you specify) the displayed contents of the MMU

Configurator

This chapter has these sections:

•

Creating MMU Configuration

•

MMU Configuration File Editor Pages

•

MMU Editor Menu

•

MMU Editor Toolbar

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

315

Creating MMU Configuration

•

Saving MMU Configuration

•

MMU Configurator View

12.1 Creating MMU Configuration

In order to use the MMU Configurator, you need to create an MMU configuration.

Follow these steps to create the configuration:

1. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select File > New > Other.

The New wizard starts, displaying its Select a wizard page.

2. Expand the Peripheral Configurators tree control and select MMU Configuration

File (

Figure 12-1 ).

Figure 12-1. Select a wizard Page of New Wizard

3. Click Next.

The New wizard closes and the MMU Configurator Wizard starts, displaying its

MMU Configurator File page.

4. In the Container text box, type the path of the directory where you want to store the

MMU configuration, or click Browse to find and select the new file container.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

316 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 12 Memory Management Unit Configurator

5. In the File name text box, type the name of the MMU configuration, or leave the default name intact.

NOTE

If you enter a new name, ensure to preserve the

.mmu

file extension.

6. Expand a tree control in the Device Number group.

7. From the expanded list, select the target hardware for which you want to create the

MMU configuration. For example,

B4860

( Figure 12-2

).

Figure 12-2. MMU Configurator File Page of MMU Configurator Wizard

8. Click Finish.

NOTE

When started in the offline mode, the MMU Configurator fills in the required defaults for all fields.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

317

MMU Configuration File Editor Pages

The MMU Configurator Wizard closes. CodeWarrior IDE generates the MMU configuration file in the specified container directory and opens the MMU

Configuration File Editor.

12.2 MMU Configuration File Editor Pages

This section explains each page of the MMU Configuration File Editor.

You use these pages to configure MMU mapping and translation properties. The tabbed interface of the MMU Configuration File Editor displays pages for configuration options and for the generated code.

NOTE

When you specify settings in the MMU Configuration File

Editor, configure the tabbed pages in left-to-right order. For example, configure the General page before configuring the

Translations page. In addition, within a page, configure settings from the top-left position to the bottom-right position.

Table 12-1 lists the MMU Configuration File Editor pages.

General

Translations

new_file.mmu

Page

Table 12-1. MMU Configuration File Editor Pages

Description

This page helps you configure the overall MMU configurations (as opposed to specific properties for each virtual-to-physical map entry).

This page helps you configure the program and data translations (virtual-tophysical address mappings) for the StarCore 3900FP DSP.

This page displays the generated MMU state file. MMU Configurator generates the state file each time you change the MMU configuration.

12.2.1 General

Use this page to configure the overall MMU configurations (as opposed to specific properties for each virtual-to-physical map entry).

Figure 12-3 shows the General page of the MMU Configuration File Editor.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

318 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 12 Memory Management Unit Configurator

Figure 12-3. MMU Configuration File Editor - General Page

NOTE

If you check the Voluntary Cache Commands Cancel checkbox, the MMU cancels the cache command for program and data except for DFLUSH and DSYNC. Similarly, if you check the Voluntary Cache Commands Error checkbox, the

MMU indicates the core for DFETCH/DFL2C*/DMALLOC/

PFETCH/PFL2C* address errors.

Table 12-2 explains the options available on the General page of the MMU Configuration

File Editor.

Table 12-2. MMU Configuration File Editor - General Page Settings

Address Translation

Option

Memory Protection

Description

Checked - Enables address translation. For example, translation occurs from a virtual address to a physical address.

Cleared - Disables address translation. For example, translation does not occur from a virtual address to a physical address.

This option corresponds to the Address Translation Enable (ATE) bit of the

MMU Control Register (M_CR).

Checked - Enables memory protection checking for all enabled segment descriptors. With this option checked, the system consumes more power.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

319

MMU Configuration File Editor Pages

Table 12-2. MMU Configuration File Editor - General Page Settings (continued)

Gather Enable

Data Cache Enable

Stack Overrun Error

Option

Instruction Cache Enable

Error Detection Code Exception

Voluntary Cache Commands Cancel

Voluntary Cache Commands Error

Description

Cleared - Disables memory protection checking for all enabled segment descriptors. This option corresponds to the Memory Protection Enable

(MPE) bit of the MMU Control Register (M_CR).

Checked - Enables the gather option.

Cleared - Disables the gather option.

Checked - Enables the cache in instruction mode.

Cleared - Disables the cache instruction mode.

Checked - Enables the data cache mode.

Cleared - Disables the data cache mode.

Checked - Throws error for stack overrun.

Cleared - Does not throw error for stack overrun.

Checked - Enables the error detection mode for code exceptions.

Cleared - Disables the error detection mode for code exceptions.

Checked - Cancels the voluntary cache commands.

Cleared - Does not cancel the voluntary cache commands.

Checked - Enables the voluntary cache commands error mode.

Cleared - Disables the voluntary cache commands error.

12.2.2 Translations

Use the Translations page to define and display program and data translations (virtualto-physical address mappings) for the StarCore 3900FP DSPs.

The MMU Configuration File Editor generates the appropriate descriptors for the program and data Memory-Address Translation Table (MATT).

On the Translations page, details of program and/or data translations are shown in the

MATT table on the left side and settings of the entry, currently selected in the MATT table, are summarized on the right side. By clicking the header of a column in the MATT table, you can sort the table data based on that column. Modified translations in the

MATT table display in blue color. Similarly, erroneous translations display in red color.

To modify a translation, follow these steps:

1. Select an option from the Select Translations drop-down list within the Type group.

Based on the option selected in the Select Translations drop-down list, the MATT table displays details of program and/or data translations.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

320 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 12 Memory Management Unit Configurator

2. Select a translation from the MATT table. The options displayed in the Properties group vary depending on the type of translation selected in the MATT table.

3. Change the Address, Size, and Properties group settings.

Figure 12-4 shows the Translations page of the MMU Configuration File Editor when a

program translation is selected in the MATT table.

Figure 12-4. MMU Configuration File Editor - Translations Page for a Program

Translation

Figure 12-5 shows the Translations page of the MMU Configuration File Editor when a

data translation is selected in the MATT table.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

321

MMU Configuration File Editor Pages

Figure 12-5. MMU Configuration File Editor - Translations Page for a Data Translation

Table 12-3 explains the options available on the Translations page of the MMU

Configuration File Editor.

Table 12-3. MMU Configuration File Editor - Translations Page Settings

Option

Show Translations

Virtual Start

Virtual End

Physical Start

Physical End

Number

Type

Task ID

DAPS (for data translations only)

Explanation

Select an option from the drop-down list to specify which translations to display.

• Enabled - Selecting this option displays all enabled translations in the MATT table. This is the default selection for the configurator mode.

• All - Selecting this option displays all translations in the MATT table. This is the default selection for the editor mode.

• Program - Selecting this option displays all program translations in the MATT table.

• Data - Selecting this option displays all data translations in the MATT table.

Specifies the virtual base address of the program or data segment, selected in the

MATT table.

Specifies the virtual end base address of the program or data segment.

Specifies the most-significant part of the physical address to be used for translation.

Specifies the end part of the physical address to be used for translation.

Specifies the size (without unit) of the program or data segment.

Specifies the unit of the size of the program or data segment.

• B - Bytes

• KB - Kilo Bytes

• MB - Mega Bytes

• GB - Giga Bytes

Specifies the task ID for the program or data segment.

Specifies whether to allow supervisor-level read (r-), write (-w), both (rw), or neither

(--) types of data access. This option corresponds to the Data Access Permission in

Supervisor Level (DAPS) bits of the Data Segment Descriptor Registers A

(M_DSDAx).

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

322 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 12 Memory Management Unit Configurator

Table 12-3. MMU Configuration File Editor - Translations Page Settings (continued)

Prefetch Policy

L2 Partitioning ID

Peripheral Space (for data translations only)

Option Explanation

Specifies the prefetch policy for the program or data segment:

• No Prefetch

• Prefetch on miss access

• Prefetch on any access

• Reserved

Specifies the L2 partitioning ID for the program or data segment.

Specifies the peripheral space for the data segment:

• Memory

• Peripheral

Checked - MMU enables the write through option.

Write-Through (for data translations only)

Cacheable

PAPS (for program translations only)

Cleared - MMU disables the write through option.

Checked - Enables caching of the segment in the instruction cache.

Cleared - Disables caching of the segment in the instruction cache.

Checked - Segment has supervisor-level fetch permission for program accesses. If you check the PAPU option, you disable program-protection checks for this segment.

Cleared - Segment does not have supervisor-level fetch permission for program accesses.

This option corresponds to the Program Access Permission in Supervisor Level

(PAPS) bit of the Program Segment Descriptor Registers A (M_PSDAx).

Checked - MMU enables the bank 0 option.

Bank 0 (for data translations only)

Stack Descriptor (for data translations only)

Guarded Segment (for data translations only)

Cleared - MMU disables the bank 0 option.

Checked - MMU enables the stack descriptor.

Cleared - MMU disables the stack descriptor.

Checked - MMU enables the guarded segment option.

Entry Enabled

Coherent

Cleared - MMU disables the guarded segment option.

Checked - MMU enables this translation entry.

Cleared - MMU disables this translation entry.

Checked - MMU enables the coherent entry.

Cleared - MMU disables the coherent entry.

12.2.3 new_file.mmu

The new_file.mmu page contains the generated MMU state file.

The MMU Configuration File Editor generates the state file each time you change the

MMU configuration. The state file contains target-specific register-state information, as well as Family and Target Device Number state data that you specified in the wizard you used to create the configuration.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

323

MMU Editor Menu

The MMU Configurator uses the state file to re initialize the settings on each page. You can maintain a collection of state files and load the file that initializes settings for a particular set of translations.

Figure 12-6 shows the new_file.mmu page of the MMU Configuration File Editor.

Figure 12-6. MMU Configuration File Editor - < filename>.mmu Page

NOTE

The MMU Configuration File Editor regenerates the

new_file.mmu page when you change settings in the MMU

Configuration File Editor pages.

12.3 MMU Editor Menu

The MMU Configuration File Editor has an associated menu, MMU Editor, that displays in the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, when MMU Configuration File Editor is active in the

Editor view.

Table 12-4 explains each menu item in the MMU Editor menu.

Save C

Save ASM

Menu Item

Table 12-4. MMU Editor Menu Items

Icon Description

Saves the generated C code to a new .c file.

Saves the generated assembly code to a new .asm file.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

324 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Save TCL

Menu Item

Read Target Registers

Write Target Registers

Chapter 12 Memory Management Unit Configurator

Table 12-4. MMU Editor Menu Items (continued)

Icon Description

Saves the generated TCL script to a new .tcl file.

Updates the content of the MMU

Configuration File Editor pages to reflect the current values of the target hardware registers.

Writes the modified content of the MMU

Configuration File Editor pages to the target hardware registers.

12.4 MMU Editor Toolbar

The MMU Configuration File Editor has an associated toolbar that displays in the

CodeWarrior IDE toolbar, when MMU Configuration File Editor is active in the Editor view.

Table 12-5 explains each toolbar button.

Toolbar Button

Save C Source

Table 12-5. MMU Editor Toolbar Buttons

Icon Description

Saves the generated C code to a new .c file.

Save ASM Source

Save TCL Source

Load MMU Configurator state from active thread

Write active thread registers from MMU

Configurator state

Saves the generated assembly code to a new .asm

file.

Saves the generated TCL script to a new .tcl file.

Updates the content of the MMU Configuration File

Editor pages to reflect the current values of the target hardware registers.

Writes the modified content of the MMU

Configuration File Editor pages to the target hardware registers.

12.5 Saving MMU Configuration

This section explains how to save the changes you made in the MMU Configurator.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

325

Saving MMU Configuration

Each time you change the settings in the MMU Configurator File Editor, you create a pending or unsaved change. In order to commit those pending changes, you need to save the MMU Configurator settings to a file. If an asterisk (*) appears before the title of the

MMU Configuration File Editor, it implies that the editor still has unsaved changes.

•

Saving MMU Configuration File Editor Settings

•

Saving Generated C Code

•

Saving Generated Assembly Code

•

Saving Generated TCL Script

12.5.1 Saving MMU Configuration File Editor Settings

Follow these steps to save the current settings of the MMU Configuration File Editor:

1. Select the MMU Configuration File Editor.

2. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select File > Save.

The IDE saves the current settings of the MMU Configuration File Editor to the

.mmu

file.

12.5.2 Saving Generated C Code

The generated C code is unique for each target. Follow these steps to save the C code generated by the MMU Configuration File Editor:

1. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select MMU Editor > Save C to save the generated C code. Alternatively, click the Save C Source button in the MMU editor toolbar.

A standard Save dialog box appears.

2. Specify the file name in the File name text box and click Save to save the generated code as a new file.

NOTE

The MMU Configuration File Editor regenerates the C code when you change settings in the MMU Configuration File

Editor pages.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

326 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 12 Memory Management Unit Configurator

12.5.3 Saving Generated Assembly Code

The generated assembly (ASM) code is unique for each target. Follow these steps to save the ASM code generated by the MMU Configuration File Editor:

1. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select MMU Editor > Save ASM to save the generated assembly code. Alternatively, click the Save ASM Source button in the

MMU editor toolbar.

A standard Save dialog box appears.

2. Specify the file name in the File name text box and click Save to save the generated code as a new file.

NOTE

The MMU Configuration File Editor regenerates the assembly code when you change settings in the MMU Configuration File

Editor pages.

12.5.4 Saving Generated TCL Script

The generated TCL script can be executed within the Debugger Shell view, or the

Debugger Shell can execute the generated TCL script as an initialization script for the target hardware. The generated TCL script is unique for each target.

Follow these steps to save the TCL script generated by the MMU Configuration File

Editor:

1. From the CodeWarrior IDE menu bar, select MMU Editor > Save TCL to save the generated TCL script. Alternatively, click the Save TCL Source button in the MMU editor toolbar.

A standard Save dialog box appears.

2. Specify the file name in the File name text box and click Save to save the generated code as a new file.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

327

MMU Configurator View

NOTE

The MMU Configuration File Editor regenerates the TCL script when you change settings in the MMU Configuration

File Editor pages.

12.6 MMU Configurator View

Use the MMU Configurator view to examine the current state of a thread's MMU configuration during the debug session.

You can also detach the MMU Configurator view into its own floating window and reposition the window within the collection of views.

To open the MMU Configurator view, follow these steps:

1. Start a debugging session.

2. In the Debug view of the Debug perspective, select the process for which you want to work with MMU.

3. Select Window > Show View > Other.

The Show View dialog box appears.

4. Expand the Debug tree control.

5. Select MMU Configurator (

Figure 12-7

).

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

328 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 12 Memory Management Unit Configurator

Figure 12-7. Show View Dialog Box - MMU Configurator

6. Click OK.

The Show View dialog box closes. The MMU Configurator view appears, attached to an existing collection of views in the current perspective.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

329

MMU Configurator View

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

330 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 13

Maple Memory Management Unit Configurator

This chapter explains how to use the Maple Memory Management Unit (MMU)

Configurator. To use the Maple MMU:

• You set up a mapping for data addresses

• Enable address translation

The mapping links the virtual addresses to the physical addresses. Translation occurs before software acts on the addresses.

The Maple MMU Configurator simplifies peripheral-register initialization of the Maple

MMU registers. You can use the Maple MMU Configurator to examine the status of the current Maple MMU configuration.

Use the Maple MMU Configurator to:

• Configure Maple MMU general control registers

• Configure Maple MMU memory-address-translation properties

• Display the current contents of each register

• Write the displayed contents from the Maple MMU Configurator to the Maple MMU registers

This chapter has these sections:

•

Maple MMU Configurator View

•

Maple MMU Configurator View Pages

•

Maple MMU Configurator View Menu

13.1 Maple MMU Configurator View

Use the Maple MMU Configurator view to examine the current state of a thread's

Maple MMU configuration during the debug session.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

331

Maple MMU Configurator View Pages

You can also detach the Maple MMU Configurator view into its own floating window and reposition the window within the collection of views.

To open the Maple MMU Configurator view, follow these steps:

1. Start a debugging session.

2. In the Debug view of the Debug perspective, select the process for which you want to work with Maple MMU.

3. Select Window > Show View > Other.

The Show View dialog box appears.

4. Expand the Debug tree control.

5. Select Maple MMU Configurator (as the following figure shows).

Figure 13-1. Show View Dialog Box - Maple MMU Configurator

6. Click OK.

The Show View dialog box closes. The Maple MMU Configurator view appears, attached to an existing collection of views in the current perspective.

13.2 Maple MMU Configurator View Pages

This section explains each page of the Maple MMU Configurator view.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

332 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 13 Maple Memory Management Unit Configurator

You use these pages to configure Maple MMU mapping and translation properties. The tabbed interface of the Maple MMU Configurator view displays pages for the configuration options.

NOTE

When you specify settings in the Maple MMU Configurator view, configure the tabbed pages in left-to-right order. For example, configure the General page before configuring the

Translations page. In addition, within a page, configure settings from the top-left position to the bottom-right position.

The following table lists the Maple MMU Configurator pages.

General

Translations

Page

Table 13-1. Maple MMU Configurator Pages

Description

This page helps you configure the overall Maple MMU configurations (as opposed to specific properties for each virtual-to-physical map entry).

This page helps you configure the data translations (virtual-to-physical address mappings) for maple instances.

13.2.1 General

Use this page to configure the overall Maple MMU configurations (as opposed to specific properties for each virtual-to-physical map entry).

The following figure shows the General page of the Maple MMU Configurator.

Figure 13-2. Maple MMU Configurator - General Page

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

333

Maple MMU Configurator View Pages

The following table describes the options available on the General page of the Maple

MMU Configurator.

Memory Protection

Violation Monitor

Clear Violation

Table 13-2. Maple MMU Configurator - General Page Settings

Select Maple Instance

Address Translation

Option Description

Use this option to select Lte0, Lte1 and wcdma maple instances.

NOTE: The availability of the options depends on the target selected.

• LTE1 is not supported for b4420.

• LTE0, LTE1 and WCDMA are supported for

B4060, B4460 and B4860.

• Maple instances are not supported for G4860 and SC3900 targets.

Checked - Enables address translation. For example, translation occurs from a virtual address to a physical address.

Cleared - Disables address translation. For example, translation does not occur from a virtual address to a physical address.

This option corresponds to the Address Translation Enable

(ATE) bit of the register from the list below, depending on the

Maple instance you selected:

• MAPLE_B3LW0_M_CR

• MAPLE_B3LW1_M_CR

• MAPLE_B3W_M_CR

Checked - Enables memory protection checking for all enabled segment descriptors. With this option checked, the system consumes more power.

Cleared - Disables memory protection checking for all enabled segment descriptors.

This option corresponds to the Memory Protection Enable

(MPE) bit of the register from the list below, depending on the

Maple instance you selected:

• MAPLE_B3LW0_M_CR

• MAPLE_B3LW1_M_CR

• MAPLE_B3W_M_CR

Displays current violation status.

Use this button to clear the violation data.

13.2.2 Translations

Use the Translations page to define and display data translations (virtual-to-physical address mappings) for the maple instances.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

334 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 13 Maple Memory Management Unit Configurator

The Maple MMU Configurator generates the appropriate descriptors for the data

Memory-Address Translation Table (MATT).

On the Translations page, details of the data translations are shown in the MATT table on the left side and settings of the entry, currently selected in the MATT table, are summarized on the right side. By clicking the header of a column in the MATT table, you can sort the table data based on that column. Modified translations in the MATT table display in blue color. Similarly, erroneous translations display in red color.

To modify a translation, follow these steps:

1. Select an option from the Select Translations drop-down list within the Type group.

Based on the option selected in the Select Translations drop-down list, the MATT table displays details of data translations.

2. Select a translation from the MATT table.

3. Change the Address, Size, and Properties group settings.

The following figure shows the Translations page of the Maple MMU Configurator.

Figure 13-3. Maple MMU Configurator - Translations Page

The following table describes the options available on the Translations page of the Maple

MMU Configurator.

Table 13-3. MMU Configuration File Editor - Translations Page Settings

Option

Select Translations

Virtual Start

Virtual End

Physical Start

Physical End

Explanation

Select an option from the drop-down list to specify which translations to display.

• Enabled - Selecting this option displays all enabled translations in the MATT table. This is the default selection for the configurator mode.

• All - Selecting this option displays all translations in the MATT table.

Specifies the virtual base address of the data segment, selected in the MATT table.

Specifies the virtual end base address of the data segment.

Specifies the most-significant part of the physical address to be used for translation.

Specifies the end part of the physical address to be used for translation.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

335

Maple MMU Configurator View Menu

Table 13-3. MMU Configuration File Editor - Translations Page Settings (continued)

Number

Type

Task ID

DAPS

L2 Partitioning ID

Write-Through

Entry Enabled

Cacheable

Coherent

Option

Guarded Segment

Explanation

Specifies the size (without unit) of the data segment.

Specifies the unit of the size of the data segment.

• B - Bytes

• KB - Kilo Bytes

• MB - Mega Bytes

• GB - Giga Bytes

Specifies the task ID for the data segment.

Specifies whether to allow supervisor-level read (r-), write (-w), both (rw), or neither

(--) types of data access. This option corresponds to the Data Access Permission in

Supervisor Level (DAPS) bits of the register from the list below, depending on the

Maple instance selected by you:

• MAPLE_B3LW0_M_DSDAx

• MAPLE_B3LW1_M_DSDAx

• MAPLE_B3W_M_DSDAx

Specifies the L2 partitioning ID for the data segment.

Checked - MMU enables the write-through policy attribute for the segment.

Cleared - MMU disables the write-through policy attribute for the segment.

Checked - MMU enables the guarded attribute for the segment.

Cleared - MMU disables the guarded attribute for the segment.

Checked - MMU enables this translation entry.

Cleared - MMU disables this translation entry.

Checked - The segment is cacheable in DCache and L2 Cache.

Cleared - The segment is not cacheable in DCache and L2 Cache.

Checked - MMU enables the memory coherent attribute.

Cleared - MMU disables the memory coherent attribute.

13.3 Maple MMU Configurator View Menu

This section decsribes the Maple MMU Configurator view menu.

The following table describes toolbar menu item:

Table 13-4. Maple MMU Configurator View Menu Items

Menu Item

Read Target Registers

Write Target Registers

Icon Description

Loads Maple MMU Configurator state from the currently selected maple instance.

Writes the active thread registers from

Maple MMU Configurator state.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

336 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 14

StarCore DSP Utilities

This chapter explains how to use the utility programs included in the CodeWarrior

Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures

product.

This chapter explains:

•

Archiver Utility

•

Disassembler Utility

•

ELF File Dump Utility

•

ELF2XX Utility

•

Name Utility

•

Size Utility

14.1 Archiver Utility

Use the Archiver utility groups to separate object files into a single file for linking or archival storage.

You can add, extract, delete, and replace files in an existing archive.

To invoke the Archiver utility from the command prompt, type:

sc100-ar [Options] archive <file...>

NOTE

The sc100-ar

utility is in this directory:

Parameters

<CWinstallDir>\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin

Archiver utility command-line options are case-sensitive.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

337

Archiver Utility

option

Table 14-1 defines the purpose and effect of each command-line option.

archive

Name of the archive file.

file

Name of the file or files to add, extract, replace, or delete from the specified archive file.

Separate multiple filenames with spaces. The archiver processes files in the order listed on the command line.

argument file

Name of a file that contains archiver command-line options. The syntax rules for an argument file are listed below.

• Begin a comment line with the # character.

• Each line must end with a backslash (\) character.

Table 14-1. Archiver Utility-Command-Line

Options

Option

-c

-d

-e

-f

-p

-r

-s

Description

Suppresses the default diagnostic message written to standard error when the archive is created. This option is valid only with the -r option.

Deletes the listed files from the specified archive.

Recreates the whole archive. This option is valid only with the -r option.

Forces adding an unknown file format to the library.

This option is valid only with the -r option.

Writes the contents of the listed files from the specified archive to the standard output. If the command does not include any filenames, the archiver writes the contents of all files, in their order in the archive.

Replaces the files, appends new files to the specified archive, or creates a new archive that contains the listed files.

Forces the extraction of .elf files from the specified archive, addition or replacement the .elf files instead of the whole archive. This option is valid with just the -r option.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

338 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

-t

-u

-v

-V

-x

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

Table 14-1. Archiver Utility-Command-Line Options

(continued)

Option Description

Writes the archive table of contents, including the specified files, to the standard output. If no files are specified, all files in the archive are included in the list in the order that they appear in the archive.

Updates archive files that have been changed since the last update. This option is valid only with the -r option.

Produces verbose output:

• -d, -r or -x : Produces a file-by-file description of archive creation and maintenance

• -p : Writes the name of a file to the standard output before writing the file contents to the standard output

• -t: Includes a long listing of file information within the archive

Displays the current archiver version and exits.

Extracts the listed files from the specified archive. If the command does not include any file names, the archiver extracts all files of the archive. This option does not change archive contents.

14.2 Disassembler Utility

Use the Disassembler utility to convert the ELF object files to SC3900fp assembly code.

The object files can be linked (

.eld

) or non-linked (

.eln

and

.elb

).

In the interactive mode, you provide hexadecimal encoding, which the disassembler converts to assembly code. The disassembler can dump labels, equ directives, and section information such as type and alignment.

Additional features include:

• Interpretation of relocation information

• Data disassembling

• Label (symbol) address output

• Padding awareness (alignment)

• Statistics display

To invoke the disasmsc100

utility from the command prompt, type:

disasmsc100 [option ...] <srcfile>

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

339

Disassembler Utility

Parameters option

Table 14-2 defines the purpose and effect of each command-line option. All the options

are case-sensitive.

srcfile

Any ELF object file.

NOTE

The disasmsc100 utility is in directory:

<CWinstallDir>\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin

A simple example command line is:

disasmsc100 -f -m -q -r bin/coder.eld

Which starts disassembly of file bin/coder.eld

printing loopstart-loopend

instead of lpmarkka/lpmarkb

(

-f

), displaying intermixed C-source and disassembled code (

-m

), suppressing the banner (

-q

), and rearranging packet instructions (

-r

).

-arch<tgt>

-b<label>

-c

-e<label>

-f

-h<addr>

-i{l|b}

-l<addr>

-m

-n

-p

-q

Table 14-2. disasmsc100 Disassembler-Command-Line Options

Option Description

Specifies the architecture for interactive mode. Valid tgt values are sc3900fp and b4860. Ignored during disassembly of an ELF object file, which includes the hard coded architecture version.

Specifies the disassembly starting point, the VLES input file at the specified label.

Specifies compact output mode, prints instructions in an execution-set on a single line.

Ends disassembly at the input file at the specified label.

Prints loopstart-loopend directives instead of lpmarka/ lpmarkb directives.

Stops disassembly when it reaches the specified hexadecimal address.

Specifies interactive mode with little endianness (l) or big endianness (b). Default target is sc3900fp; to specify a different target, use the -arch option.

Starts disassembly at the specified hexadecimal address.

Specifies mixed view: C source-code lines mixed with disassembled code lines.

Displays unmangled form of C++ names.

Suppresses the PC display for VLESes.

Suppresses banner display.

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

340 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

-v

-x

-z

-r{i}

-s

-u

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

Table 14-2. disasmsc100 Disassembler-Command-Line Options (continued)

Option Description

Rearranges instructions in packets in the order IFT, IFF, and

IFA.Without the optional i value, places DALU instructions before AGU instructions. With the optional i value, does not rearrange AGU instructions, permitting reassembly of the disassembled dump file.

Suppresses display of labels, headers, and global information

(equs, globals, and section information).

Ignores relocation information (relevant for .eln and .elb

files).

Specifies verbose mode.

Displays mixed hexadecimal codification and assembly code.

Displays statistics after each section: number of VLESes with

0 - 4 DALU instructions, number of VLESes with 0 - 2 AGU instructions, not-generated instructions, and so forth.

In the usual disassembler output, the PC address precedes each execution set; the execution set is in a comment. Another comment at the beginning of each execution set, specifies the grouping prefix type. The following listing shows a simple output example.

Listing: Simple Disassembler Output Example

;00001f10:

DW58

[ ;one word low registerprefix

ifa

iadd d2,d1

ift

move.l (r3),r1

]

NOTE

The

-p

option suppresses the PC value in such output.

Another option that affects the output is

-z

, which specifies statistics. The following listing shows an example.

Listing: disasmsc100 Disassembler-Output Produced by -z Option

;Global EQUs

X equ $fffd zl equ $fffffffe

;Local EQUs lab1 equ $fffffffd

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

341

Disassembler Utility

lab3 equ $fffffffd

section .text2

sectype progbits

secflags alloc

secflags execinstr

;00000000:

_f3 type func

F__MemAllocArea_18_00000000

F__MemAllocArea_18

nop

;00000002:

F__MemAllocArea_18_00000002

nop

;00000004:

F_f3_end

F__MemAllocArea_18_end

endsec

-------------------------------------------------------

General Statistics:

No of instruction: 2

No of packets: 2

No of 1-word-low-prefixes: 0

No of 1-word-high-prefixes: 0

No of 2-word-prefixes: 0

No of DALU instructions: 0 0%

No of AGU instructions: 0 0%

No of prefixes and NOP instructions: 2 100%

-------------------------------------------------------

DALU Statistics:

No of VLESs with 0 DALU: 2 100%

No of VLESs with 1 DALU: 0 0%

No of VLESs with 2 DALU: 0 0%

No of VLESs with 3 DALU: 0 0%

No of VLESs with 4 DALU: 0 0%

DALU parallelism: 0.00

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

342 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

-------------------------------------------------------

AGU Statistics:

No of VLESs with 0 AGU: 2 100%

No of VLESs with 1 AGU: 0 0%

No of VLESs with 2 AGU: 0 0%

AGU parallelism: 0.00

-------------------------------------------------------

DALU/AGU Usage Details:

0 DALU | 1 DALU | 2 DALU | 3 DALU | 4 DALU

0 AGU 100% 0% 0% 0% 0%

1 AGU 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

2 AGU 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

-------------------------------------------------------

Used Instructions:

nop 2

-------------------------------------------------------

Ensure that you read these additional considerations while using the Disassembler utility:

1. If there is data in the text sections, for example, you wrote assembling code and used dcb statements, the disassembler tries to match data with instructions.

2. Disassembly happens incrementally. If no instruction matches the current bytes from the data stream, the disassembler dumps two bytes as data ( dcb

directives) and then tries to match an instruction starting with the next bytes. Code alignment due to the

ALIGN assembler directive can lead to this situation.

3. The disassembler does not consider

.bss

-like sections (

SHT_NOBITS

); it also ignores all symbols defined inside such sections.

4. The disassembler follows this algorithm to generate loopstart-loopend

pseudoinstructions: a. Traverse source file VLES by VLES, incrementing PC at each step b. Disassemble input file c. Memorize label of each dosetup

instruction found d. For each lpmarkx

instruction found, use information gathered from doen

/ dosetup instructions to compute loopstart

/ loopend

index and location

However, as this algorithm is not flow sensitive, it fails in cases like the one discussed in the following listing.

Listing: Algorithm Failure Example

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

343

ELF File Dump Utility

[...]

dosetup3 ls3

bt l1

doen3 #5

bt 12 l1:

doen3 #7 l2:

loopstart3

[...]

loopend3

[...]

NOTE

The disassembler does not know which doen corresponds to loopstart3

, so ends up with an unmatched doen

instruction and prompts fatal error message. Disassembly is still possible if you omit the

f

command-line option.

14.3 ELF File Dump Utility

Use the Executable and Linking Format (ELF) file Dump Utility to output the headers of absolute and linkable object files in a human-readable format.

The information produced by the utility depends on the selected ELF object file type:

• Absolute (executable) -- Default output is ELF header, all program headers, and all sections headers.

• Linkable (relocatable) -- Default output is ELF header and all section headers.

To invoke the ELF dump utility from the command-line prompt, type: sc100-elfdump [option ...] <elf-file>

NOTE

The ELF dump utility is in this directory:

Parameters

<CWinstallDir>\SC\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

344 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

option

Table 14-3 defines the purpose and effect of each command-line option. Without options,

the utility returns the contents of the ELF Ehdr, Phdr, and Shdr structures and the symbol table. If you specify command-line options, the utility returns only the information that you specify on the command line.

NOTE

sc100-elfdump utility command-line options are case-sensitive.

elf-file

-n

-o

-P

-q one or more filenames, including optional pathnames. The input file should be either

Absolute- or Relocatable ELF object file.

-i

-L

-N

-A

-a

-b

-D

-d

-E

-e file

-g

-h

-I

-R file

-r

-S

Table 14-3. ELF File Dump Utility-Command-Line Options

Option Description

Writes the contents of all program segments

Writes the contents of all sections

Writes the contents of all SHT_PROGBITS sections

Writes the contents of all PT_DYNAMIC segments, does not apply to the SC3900fp DSP core

Writes the contents of all SHT_DYNAMIC sections, does not apply to the SC3900fp DSP core

Writes ELF header information

Writes error messages to the specified file instead of stderr

Writes the contents of all debug sections in hex format

Writes the contents of all SHT_HASH sections, does not apply to the SC3900fp DSP core

Writes the contents of all PT_INTERP segments, does not apply to the SC3900fp DSP core

Interprets the section contents

Writes the contents of all PT_LOAD segments

Writes the contents of all PT_NOTE segments, does not apply to the SC3900fp DSP core

Writes the contents of all SHT_NOTE sections

Writes the contents of overlay table sections

Writes the contents of all PT_PHDR segments

Specifies quiet mode, limits header information to the specified sections and segments

Writes the output to the specified file, instead of to the standard output

Writes the contents of all SHT_REL and SHT_RELA sections

Writes the contents of all PT_SHLIB segments, does not apply to the SC3900fp DSP core

Table continues on the next page...

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

345

-V

-X

-x

-y

-z

ELF File Dump Utility

Table 14-3. ELF File Dump Utility-Command-Line Options (continued)

-s

-t

-U

-u

Option Description

Writes the contents of all SHT_SHLIB sections, does not apply to the SC3900fp DSP core

Writes the contents of all SHT_STRTAB sections

Writes the contents of all unknown-type segments as hex dumps

Writes the contents of all unknown-type sections as hex dumps

Displays the version of the ELF file dump utility

Dumps all program-segment contents as hex

Dumps contents of all sections as hex

Writes the contents of all SHT_SYMTAB sections

Writes the contents of all SHT_DYNSYM sections, does not apply to the SC3900fp DSP core

The following listing shows the output of the ELF file dump utility.

NOTE

The file name is hello.eld

.

The ELF header extends from line e_ident

through line e_shstrndx

.

The program headers comprise lines

Segment 0

,

Segment 1

and their subordinate lines.

The section headers comprise the remaining lines.

Listing: ELF File Dump Utility-Output

hello.eld:

e_ident : 7f 45 4c 46 02 02 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

(ELF 64-bit LSB Version 1

e_type : 2 (Executable file)

e_machine : 58 (StarCore 100)

e_version : 1

e_entry : 0x4000c778

e_phoff : 0

e_shoff : 0x40

e_flags : 0x200 (SC3900fp (unknown revision))

e_ehsize : 64

e_phentsize : 56

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

346 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

e_phnum : 6

e_shentsize : 64

e_shnum : 24

e_shstrndx : 23

Segment 0:

p_type : PT_LOAD

p_offset : 0x190

p_vaddr : 0x40000000

p_paddr : 0x40000000

p_filesz : 12

p_memsz : 12

p_flags : 0x6 PF_R PF_W

p_align : 4

Segment 1:

p_type : PT_LOAD

p_offset : 0x1a0

p_vaddr : 0x40001000

p_paddr : 0x40001000

p_filesz : 200

p_memsz : 200

p_flags : 0x4 PF_R

p_align : 8

Section 0:

sh_name :

sh_type : SHT_NULL

sh_flags : 0

sh_addr : 0

sh_offset : 0

sh_size : 0

sh_link : 0

sh_info : 0

sh_addralign : 0

sh_entsize : 0

Section 1:

sh_name : ddr_shared_data_nc_wt

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

347

ELF2XX Utility

sh_type : SHT_STARCORE_OVERLAY

sh_flags : 0x3 SHF_WRITE SHF_ALLOC

sh_addr : 0x40000000

sh_offset : 0x190

sh_size : 12

sh_link : 0

sh_info : 0

sh_addralign : 4

sh_entsize : 0

.

.

.

14.4 ELF2XX Utility

Use the ELF2XX utility to write the information within the executable ELF file in user specific format such as srec, lod, or bin.

To invoke the ELF2XX utility from the command prompt, type: sc100-elf2xx [option ...] <input-file>

NOTE

The ELF to S-Record utility is in this directory:

<CWinstallDir>\SC\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin

Parameters

option

Table 14-4 defines the purpose and effect of each command-line option.

input-file

The filename of the ELF object file.

Listing: LOD File-Format

_START Module_ID Version Rev# Device# Asm_Version Comment

_END Entry_point_address

_DATA Memory_space Address Code_or_Data

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

348 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

_BLOCKDATA Memory_space Address Count Value

_SYMBOL Memory_space Symbol_Address ...

_COMMENT Comment

Listing: BIN File-Format

ENDIANNESS_BYTE (1Byte)

<ADDRESS - 8Bytes><SIZE_IN_BYTES - 8Bytes><data_payload>

<ADDRESS - 8Bytes><SIZE_IN_BYTES - 8Bytes><data_payload>

....

<ADDRESS -8Bytes><SIZE_IN_BYTES - 8Bytes><data_payload>

<ADDRESS = 0x00000000C007B010><SIZE = 8><value_of_entrypoint>

ENDIANNESS_BYTE

NOTE

has the value 2 for

MSB

and 1 for

LSB

. This feature can be used to dump the executable

.elf

file into a fast download format. The file can be parsed and loaded into target's memory.

Table 14-4. elf2xx Utility-Command-Line Options

Option

-t <output-type>

-DumpUninitializedData= Off

-DumpUninitializedData= On

-DumpNewLine=Off

-DumpNewLine=On

-entry_address HEX_VALUE

Description

Sets the output type format <outputtype> is one of: srec, lod , eld, , or bin

Inhibits to dump the information about the Uninitialized Data <BSS sections>

Enables to dump the information about the Uninitialized Data <BSS sections>

Inhibits dumping new line for the srec format

Enables dumping new line for the srec format.

Enables the user to change the default value of the address, where the entry point is written, to the specified

HEX_VALUE. The HEX_VALUE must be written as "0xNUMBER" (for example:

0xC007B010)

-m <arch> -#<value> <list_eld>

{ #<value> <list_eld> ...}

NOTE: This option is valid only for the bin format.

Enables us to merge one or more applications. The result of merger can be specified by the output-type argument from -t option. <arch> is one of b4420, b4860 <value> is the index of core. For example, -#0 means core

Table continues on the next page...

Mandatory

Optional

Optional

Type

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

349

ELF2XX Utility

-merge-with-symbolinformation=On

-merge-with-symbolinformation=Off

-split <arch>

-o <output-file>

-removeAllBss

-V

Table 14-4. elf2xx Utility-Command-Line Options (continued)

Option

-ccsr_address HEX_VAL

Description

zero. <list_eld> is the list of executable ELF file that are delimited by space.

Enables dumping in merged .eld file symbol information.

Disables dumping in merged .eld file symbol information. This is default behaviour.

Enables us to split an executable ELD file into multiple core specific ELD files.

<arch> is one of: b4420, b4860

Redirects the output to the specified file; standard output is used in case the file/ output is missing

Generates a srec file that does not contain records for the bss sections.

The tool will read the bss table from the input .eld file.

Displays the current version of the sc100-elf2xx utility.

Defines the CCSR start address of the first StarCore core. This information will be used by the tool to generate the .bin

files entries that will be used by the loader to program the MMU descriptors.

For B4860 the value is 0xffec40000.

Optional

Type

Valid only for bin format.

When using the output file, after loading the information into memory, the host has to write

0xa5a5a5a5

to

0xC007B000

in order to finalize the download process.

NOTE

Even if the user program uses only one core, private data for the other cores must also be included in the output file for proper boot operation.

For example, the user program generates the following output files for each of the cores:

• Core 0, project.eld

• Core 1, c1_project.eld

• Core 2, c2_project.eld

• Core 3, c3_project.eld

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

350 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

To create an S-record output called led_output.s

from the combined object files, the sc100elf2xx

utility is called, as the code in the following listing shows. The

-t srec

selects an Srecord output format. The

-o led_output.s specifies the name of the output file. The

-m b4860

selects the device. Finally, all four input

.eld files specify the object code to combine.

Listing: Running ELF2XX Utility for Multiple Input Files

installDir\SC\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin >sc100-elf2xx -t srec -o led_output.s -m b4860 -#0 project.eld -#1 c1_project.eld

-#2 c2_project.eld -#3 c3_project.eld

To create an S-record output without any

.bss

section records, the sc100-elf2xx

utility is called as shown in the following listing.

Listing: Running ELF2XX Utility for Multiple Input Files

installDir\SC\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin >sc100-elf2xx -t srec

-DumpUninitializedData=Off -removeAllBss bss_table_file.txt -m b4860 -

#0 project.eld -#1 c1_project.eld -#2 c2_project.eld -#3 c3_project.eld

-removeAllBss bss_table_file.txt option ensures that all the bss sections are eliminated, no mater where they are placed, based on the information in the bss_table_file.txt

file.

This section contains the following topic:

•

L1 Defense Support

•

Extract core specific images from multicore image

14.4.1 L1 Defense Support

This section describes the L1 defense support in the elf2xx utility for StarCore 3900FP

DSPs.

When reloading a core’s image, the loader must know what it should load without interfering with the running state of the other cores. In order to be able to do this, the loader (debugger or boot loader) must know which parts of the image are private and which are shared. It loads only the private parts or, in case multiple cores are restarted, also the image parts shared between the restarted and reloaded cores.

Based on the information in the segment header, the sc100-elf2xx

tool generates multiple images for each core: one containing the private code, and some other – one for each sharing space (cluster, multiple clusters, whole platform). Based on the output name, you will know to which cores each file corresponds.

You can use the following command:

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

351

ELF2XX Utility

sc100-elf2xx -t bin -o binary_image.bin -SeparateBinFiles=On -DumpUninitializedData=Off -m b4860 -entry_address 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF -ccsr_address 0xffec40000 -#0 test.eld -#1 c1_test.eld -#2 test.eld -#3 test.eld -#4 c4_test.eld -#5 c5_test.eld

The generated files name appears as:

<visible_cores>_binary_image.bin

Where visible_cores represents the cores that the image is visible on. Syntax is:

<visible_cores> =

-cX_ if the segment is private

-cX_c(X+1) if the segment is shared on one cluster

Example,

If one segment is private on core c0, the image will be emitted in file: c0_binrary_image.bin

if one segment is shared on cluster 0, the image name will be: c0_c1_binary_image.bin

if the segment is shared on the whole platform, the image name will be: c0_c1_c2_c3_c4_c5_binary_image.bin

if the segment is shared among cluster 0 and 2, the image name will be: c0_c1_c4_c5_binary_image.bin

This behavior is available only for the

.bin

output format.

Each image will contain the necessary information for the loader to program the MMU descriptors.

14.4.2 Extract core specific images from multicore image

This feature allows you to extract the core specific ELD images from a multicore ELD image which must be generated by using sc100-elf2xx. The listing below shows how to create multicore image from the core specific images.

Listing: Creating multicore image from core specific images

installDir\SC\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin >sc100-elf2xx -t eld -m b4860

-#0 project.eld -#1 c1_project.eld -#2 c2_project.eld -#3 c3_project.eld

-#4 c4_project.eld -#5 c5_project.eld -merge-with-symbol-information=On -o project.elf

The core specific images are extracted from the multicore image by using sc100-elf2xx, as shown by the listing below.

Listing: Extract core specific images

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

352 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

installDir\SC\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin >sc100-elf2xx -t eld -split b4860 project.elf -o project.eld

An ELD image is created for each core that has private segments in the multicore ELD image.

The image corresponding to core 0 will have the same name as the one provided to the

-o option ( project.eld

). The same name is used for the images corresponding the other cores but prefixed by the core identifier ( c1_project.eld

for core 1 and so on).

In order for the extracted core specific images to have the same contents (including debug information) as the original images used to create the multicore image, the multicore image should include symbol information. This behaviour is enabled by using the

-mergewith-symbol-information=On

command line option. Not specifying this option or setting it to

off

results in a multicore image that does not include symbol information and consequently, the core specific images obtained from splitting it will not include symbol information.

14.5 Name Utility

Use the name utility to display the symbolic information in each object file and library passed on the command line.

If a file contains no symbolics, the utility reports this fact.

To invoke the name utility from the command prompt, type: sc100-nm [-option ...] file ...

NOTE

The sc100-nm utility is in this directory:

<CWinstallDir>\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin

Parameters

option

Table 14-5 defines the purpose and effect of each command-line option.

NOTE

Name utility command-line options are case-sensitive.

file

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

353

Name Utility

Name of the file to process.

-A

-g

-P

-s

-t {d | o | x}

-l

-m

-u

-V

-v

Table 14-5. Name Utility-Command-Line Options

Option Effect

Writes the full pathname or library name of an object on each line.

Writes only external (global) symbol information; do not use this option with the -u option.

Writes the information in the POSIX.2 portable output format.

Prints the symbol index for archives.

Writes each numeric value in the specified format: d-decimal o-octal x-hexadecimal (the default)

Displays the original name of static symbols.

Displays unmangled names for C++ symbols that have the format mangle_name{unmangle_name}.

Writes only undefined symbols; do not use this option with the

-g option.

Displays the version of the name utility.

Sorts output by value, instead of by name.

Figure 14-1 the output generated by the name utility.

Figure 14-1. Name Utility-Output

Table 14-6 provides a key to the name utility's output.

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

354 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

U

A or a

B or b

T or t

D or d

R or r

N

?

Chapter 14 StarCore DSP Utilities

NOTE

The uppercase letters indicate global

symbols, while the lowercase letters indicate local symbols.

Character

Table 14-6. Name Utility-Output Key

Symbol Type

Undefined reference

Absolute symbol

BSS symbol

Text (code) symbol

Data symbol

Read-only data symbol

Debug symbol

Unknown symbol type or binding

14.6 Size Utility

Use the Size utility to output the size (in bytes) of each section of each ELF object file passed on the command line.

The default output lists totals for all

.text

,

.rodata

,

.data

, and

.bss

sections.

To invoke Size utility from the command prompt, type: sc100-size [-option ...] file ...

NOTE

The sc100-size utility is in this directory:

Parameters

<CWinstallDir>\StarCore_Support\compiler\bin

option

Table 14-7 defines the purpose and effect of each command-line option.

NOTE

Size utility command-line options are case-sensitive.

file

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

355

-n

-p

-V

Size Utility

Name of an ELF file.

-l

Table 14-7. Size Utility-Command-Line Options

Option Description

Specifies long listing mode: outputs names and sizes of individual sections.

Outputs the sizes of individual sections that do not get loaded.

Outputs the size of all loadable segments (program view).

Displays the version of the size utility.

Figure 14-2 shows two examples of size utility output.

• The default output, at the upper left, lists the totals of all text, rodata, data, and bss sections of the object file. It shows 148 text bytes, 72 data bytes, and 24 bss bytes.

• The lower right output example shows the long-listing format for the same object file. It shows that the 72 data bytes are in two files of 48 and 24 bytes.

Figure 14-2. Size Utility-Output

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual, Rev. 10.9.0,

11/2015

356 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Index

Index

A

about

222

Accompanying documentation

18

Actions

177

Action Type

296

Add flash device

280

Add Flash Programmer Actions

281

Adding a Register Group

180

Adding Memory Monitor

183

Adding Memory Rendering

185

Additional Arguments

82

,

98

Address

300

Address lines

301

Advanced tab

162

alias

222

Archiver Utility

337

Arguments

111

Assembler

20

,

71

Attach

107

Auto-Build Mode

45

Automatic Path Mapping

202

B

Bit Fields

175

bp

222

Build (if required) before launching

110

Building Projects

43

Build Properties

47

Build Properties for StarCore

48

Build Settings Page

32

Bus noise

300

C

C/C++ application

109

C/C++ Language

61

C/C++ Options

57

Cache View

188

Cache View Toolbar Menu

190

C Compiler

20

CCSSIM2 ISS

145

CCSSIM2 PACC

146

cd

223

change

224

Changing Bit Fields

176

Changing Build Properties

47

Changing Program Counter Value

191

Checksum actions

284

cls

226

Code and Language Options

84

Code editing

23

CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Wizard

27

CodeWarrior Command-Line Debugging

215

CodeWarrior Connection Server

141

CodeWarrior Development Studio tools

19

CodeWarrior IDE

22

CodeWarrior Profiling and Analysis tools

21

CodeWarrior TAP

154

CodeWarrior TAP - JTAG Connection through

Ethernet

157

CodeWarrior TAP - JTAG Connection through

USB

156

Command-Line Debugging Tasks

220

Common

124

Compiler Front End Messages

68

Compiling

24

config

226

Configuration Files

81

Configure flash programmer target task

280

Configuring CCS

143

Configuring Connections

140

Connect

108

Connection types

144

Contents of this manual

17

Control

63

copy

228

Create a CodeWarrior Bareboard Project Page

28

Create a flash programmer target task

278

Creating a JTAG Initialization File

261

Creating CodeWarrior Bareboard Project

35

Creating hardware diagnostics task

294

Creating MMU Configuration

316

Creating Projects

35

Creating task for import/export/fill memory

303

Custom

Customizing Debug Configurations

129

D

Data lines

301

debug

229

Debug

114

Debug Configurations

103

Debugger

21

,

112

Debugger Shell Command List

221

Debugging

24

Debugging a CodeWarrior project

134

Debugging a Project using Target Hardware

137

Debugging Externally Built Executable Files

199

Debugging Multi-Core Projects

262

Debugging Multiple Cores

268

Debugging Project Using Simulator

134

Debug Session Type

105

Debug Target Settings Page

30

,

198

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

357

Index

Debug the Executable File

209

Deleting Projects

46

Description

178

Diagnostics actions

285

dir

229

disassemble

230

Disassembler Settings

53

Disassembler Utility

339

display

231

Displaying CCS Console

142

Download

108

,

115

Dump Flash actions

286

Duplicate action

287

E

Eclipse IDE

19

Editing a Register Group

181

Editing remote system configuration

158

Edit the Launch Configuration

201

ELF2XX Utility

348

ELF File Dump Utility

344

Environment

123

Erase/Blank check actions

282

Erasing flash device

293

Ethernet TAP

147

evaluate

233

Exception Configurator

311

Execute flash programmer target task

288

Execute host-based Scope Loop on target

302

Execute target-based Memory Tests on target

303

Execution of Script Files

218

Exporting memory to file

307

F

Fill Memory

308

finish

234

fl::blankcheck

234

fl::checksum

234

fl::device

235

fl::diagnose

235

fl::disconnect

235

fl::dump

235

fl::erase

236

fl::image

236

fl::protect

236

fl::secure

237

fl::target

237

fl::verify

237

fl::write

238

Flash File to Target

291

Flash programmer

277

Flash Programmer Use Case

289

funcs

238

G

General

318

,

333

getIDEpref

239

getpid

239

Gigabit TAP

151

Gigabit TAP + Trace

149

go

239

Go to Address

187

H

Hard resetting

192

Hardware Configuration

64

Hardware diagnostics

294

help

240

history

240

How to use Flash programmer to write uboot images

289

I

Import/Export/Fill memory

303

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Page

195

Import a CodeWarrior Executable file Wizard

194

Import an Executable File

199

Import C/C++/Assembler Executable Files Page

196

Importing data into memory

305

Importing Projects

38

Importing SmartDSP OS Project

38

Include Search Paths

73

,

88

Initialization tab

159

Introduction

17

J

jtagclock

241

K

kill

241

L

L1 Defense Support

351

launch

242

Libraries

58

Linker

21

,

72

Linker Settings

56

Linking

24

Listing Contents

94

Listing File

92

Listing Format

96

loadsym

242

log

242

358

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

Index

Loop Speed

297

M

Macros

75

Main

104

Manual-Build Mode

43

Manual Path Mapping

204

Maple Memory Management Unit Configurator

331

Maple MMU Configurator View

331

Maple MMU Configurator View Menu

336

Maple MMU Configurator View Pages

332

mc::config

243

mc::go

243

mc::group

244

mc::kill

244

mc::reset

244

mc::restart

244

mc::stop

245

mc::type

245

mem

245

Memory Access

297

Memory Configuration File

213

Memory Management Unit Configurator

315

Memory tab

160

Memory Tests

298

Memory test use cases

302

MMU Configuration File Editor Pages

318

MMU Configurator View

328

MMU Configurator View Toolbar

325

MMU Editor Menu

324

Multi-Core Commands in CodeWarrior IDE

273

Multi-Core Commands in Debugger Shell

274

Multi-Core Debugging

261

Multi-Core Debugging Commands

272

N

Name Utility

353

new_file.mmu

323

next

247

nexti

248

Processor Page

29

,

197

Program/Verify actions

283

Program MATT

320

Programming file

293

Project files

23

Protect/Unprotect actions

286

protocol

248

pwd

248

Q

quitIDE

249

R

radix

249

redirect

250

refresh

250

reg

250

Registers View Context Menu

178

Release notes

17

Remove action

287

Remove Breakpoints using Breakpoints View

167

Remove Breakpoints using Marker Bar

167

Remove Hardware Breakpoints using Debugger

Shell

169

Remove Hardware Breakpoints using the IDE

168

Removing a Register Group

181

Removing Breakpoints

167

Removing Hardware Breakpoints

168

Removing Memory Rendering

186

Removing Watchpoints

172

reset

250

Resetting to Base Address

186

Resolution of Conflicting Command Names

218

restart

251

restore

251

Restoring Build Properties

48

Reverting Debug Configuration Settings

131

run

251

Running CCS

142

O

oneframe

248

Optimization

78

OS Awareness

120

Other Executables

117

Output Listing

65

P

Per Core Reset

192

Preprocessor

90

Preprocessor Settings

100

Processor

77

S

save

251

Saving Generated Assembly Code

327

Saving Generated C Code

326

Saving Generated TCL Script

327

Saving MMU Configuration

325

Saving MMU Configuration File Editor Settings

326

sc::getPhysicalAddress

253

sc::setMaxAccessLength

252

sc::setReset

253

setpc

253

setpicloadaddr

253

Setting Breakpoints

163

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

359

Index

Setting Hardware Breakpoints

166

Setting Launch Configurations

263

Setting Stack Depth

193

Setting Watchpoints

170

Size Utility

355

SmartDSP OS Page

34

Source

121

Specify target RAM settings

281

Specify the Source Lookup Path

201

stack

254

StarCore 3900 Assembler

83

StarCore 3900 C/C++ Compiler

60

StarCore 3900 C/C++ Linker Application

55

StarCore 3900 Disassembler

52

StarCore 3900 Preprocessor

99

StarCore DSP Utilities

337

StarCore Environment

50

status

254

step

254

stepi

255

stop

255

switchtarget

256

Symbolics

118

system

256

T

Target Initialization File

211

Target settings

111

Tcl Startup Script

219

Tcl Support

218

Trace and Profile

125

Translations

334

U

USB TAP

153

Using Debug Configurations Dialog Box

103

Using Debugger Shell to Set Hardware Breakpoints

166

Using IDE to Set Hardware Breakpoints

166

V

var

257

Viewing Cache

187

Viewing memory

182

Viewing Register Details

174

W

wait

258

Walking Ones

299

Warnings

67

watchpoint

259

Working with Breakpoints

163

Working with Debugger

133

Working with Debugger Shell

215

Working with Hardware Diagnostic Action editor

295

Working with Hardware Tools

277

Working with Projects

27

Working with Register Groups

179

Working with Registers

172

Working with Watchpoints

169

360

CodeWarrior Development Studio for StarCore 3900FP DSP Architectures Targeting Manual

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.

How to Reach Us:

Home Page:

freescale.com

Web Support:

freescale.com/support

Information in this document is provided solely to enable system and software implementers to use Freescale products. There are no express or implied copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits based on the information in this document.

Freescale reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein.

Freescale makes no warranty, representation, or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does

Freescale assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages.

“Typical” parameters that may be provided in Freescale data sheets and/or specifications can and do vary in different applications, and actual performance may vary over time. All operating parameters, including “typicals,” must be validated for each customer application by customer's technical experts. Freescale does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Freescale sells products pursuant to standard terms and conditions of sale, which can be found at the following address: freescale.com/SalesTermsandConditions .

Freescale, the Freescale logo, CodeWarrior, QorIQ, StarCore are trademarks of Freescale Semiconductor, Inc., Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off.

QorIQ Qonverge is a trademark of Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. The Power Architecture and Power.org word marks and the

Power and Power.org logos and related marks are trademarks and service marks licensed by Power.org.

© 2008–2015 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. All rights reserved.

Document Number CWSCDBGUG

Revision 10.9.0, 11/2015